^. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-S) 


1.0 


1.1 


IttlM    12.} 
U£  1^    III  2.2 

-iii 


us 

us 


1.25      1.4      1.6 

< 

6"     

► 

vl 


VQ 


.V 


^J 


^'Ji- 


^ 


«»• 


c/>^; 


HlOl  ^ 

Sdeices 
Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14580 

(716)  87il-4503 


0 


■V^^ 


P 


^^ 


se 


% 


CIHM/iCMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Instit  Jte  for  Historical  Microreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


Technical  and  Bibliographic  Notaa/Notaa  tachniquas  at  bibliographiquaa 


Tha  Inatituta  haa  anamptad  to  obtain  tha  baat 
original  copy  avaiiabia  for  filming.  Faaturaa  of  thia 
copy  which  may  ba  bibiiographicaily  uniqua, 
which  may  altar  any  of  tha  Imagaa  in  tha 
raproduction,  or  which  may  significantly  changa 
tha  uaual  mathod  of  filming,  ara  chaclcad  baiow. 


□    Colourad  covers/ 
Couvarturo  da  couiaur 


rn    Covers  damaged/ 


D 


D 


n 


n 


n 


Couverture  endommagia 


Covers  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Couverture  restauria  et/ou  peilicul4a 


rn    Cover  title  missing/ 


Le  titre  de  couverture  manque 


Coloured  mapa/ 

Cartes  gtographiquaa  en  couiaur 


□    Coloured  ink  (i.e.  other  than  blue  or  black)/ 
Encra  de  couleur  (i.e.  autre  que  bleue  ou  noire) 

I — I   Coloured  plataa  and/or  illuatrations/ 


Planchaa  et/ou  iiluatrationa  en  couiaur 

Bound  with  other  material/ 
ReliA  avac  d'autras  documents 

Tight  binding  may  cauae  shadows  or  distortion 
along  interior  margin/ 

La  re  liure  serrie  peut  causer  de  I'ombre  ou  de  la 
diatorsion  la  long  da  la  marga  intiriaura 

Blank  leaves  added  during  restoration  may 
appear  within  tha  text.  Whenever  possible,  these 
have  been  omitted  from  filming/ 
II  se  peut  que  certainas  pagea  blanches  ajouties 
lors  d'une  restauration  apparaiaaant  dana  la  texte. 
rrmi:  lonqwii  caia  Atait  poaaibia,  caa  pagea  n'ont 
pas  iti  filmias. 

Additional  comments:/ 
Commentaires  supplAmentaires; 


L'Institut  a  microfilm*  le  meilleur  exemplaire 
qu'il  lui  a  iti  possible  de  se  procurer.  Les  ditaiis 
da  cat  exemplaire  qui  sont  peut-Atre  uniques  du 
poim  dm  vua  bibliographique.  qui  peuvent  modifier 
une  image  reproduite.  ou  qui  peuvent  exiger  une 
modification  dans  la  m^thoda  normale  de  filmage 
sont  indiquAs  ci-dessous. 


□   Coloured  pagea/ 
Pagea 


D 


Pagea  da  couiaur 

Pagea  damaged/ 
Pagea  andommagiaa 

Pagea  restored  and/oi 

Pagea  reataurAas  et/ou  pelliculAes 

Pagea  discolotfred.  stained  or  foxei 
Pages  dAcoiories.  tacheties  ou  piquies 


[~n   Pagea  damaged/ 

r~~|   Pagea  restored  and/or  laminated/ 

r~T1    Pagea  discolotfred.  stained  or  foxed/ 


□   Pagea  detached/ 
Pagea  dttachies 

I    1    Showthrough/ 
U^   Tranaparence 

r~1    Quality  of  print  varies/ 


Qualiti  inigala  de  I'impression 

Includes  supplementary  matar'ai/ 
Comprend  du  matirial  suppl4mentaire 

Only  edition  available/ 
Seuie  Mition  disponible 


Pages  wholly  or  partially  obscured  by  errata 
slips,  tissues,  etc.,  have  been  refilmed  to 
ensure  the  best  possible  image/ 
Lea  pagea  totalement  ou  partiellement 
obscurcies  par  un  fauillet  d'errata,  une  pelure, 
etc..  ont  titi  filmies  A  nouveau  de  faqon  i 
obtenir  la  meilleure  image  possible. 


T 
t( 


Tl 

P 
o 
fi 


O 

b 
th 
si 
ot 

fil 

si 
or 


Tt 
sh 
Tl 
w 

Ml 
dil 

ani 
be 

rig 
rei 
m( 


This  item  Is  filmed  at  tha  reduction  ratio  checked  below/ 

Ce  document  est  film*  au  taux  de  rMuction  indiquA  ci-dessous. 


10X 

14X 

18X 

22X 

26X 

30X 

y 

12X 


16X 


aox 


24X 


28X 


32X 


The  copy  filmed  h«re  hat  b««n  reproduced  thanks 
to  the  generosity  of : 

National  Library  of  Canada 


L'exemplaire  f ilmA  fut  reproduit  grice  A  la 
gAnArositA  de: 

Bibliothdque  nationale  du  Canada 


The  images  appearing  here  are  the  best  quality 
possible  considering  the  condition  and  isgibility 
of  the  original  copy  and  in  Iceeping  with  the 
filming  contract  specifications. 


Les  images  suivantes  ont  At*  reproduites  avec  ie 
plus  grand  soin,  compte  tenu  de  la  condition  et 
de  la  nettet6  de  I'exempialre  film*,  et  en 
conformity  avec  les  conditions  du  contrat  de 
filmage. 


0>'iginal  copies  in  printed  paper  covers  are  filmed 
beginning  with  the  front  cover  and  ending  on 
the  last  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, or  the  back  cover  when  appropriate.  Ail 
other  original  copies  are  filmed  beginning  on  the 
first  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, and  endi.ng  on  the  last  page  with  a  printed 
or  illustrated  impression. 


Les  exemplaires  originaux  dont  la  couverture  en 
papier  est  imprimte  sont  filmte  en  commenpant 
par  Ie  premier  plat  et  en  terminant  soit  par  la 
dernidre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration,  soit  par  Ie  second 
plat,  salon  Ie  cas.  Tous  les  autres  exemplaires 
originaux  sont  filmte  en  commen^ant  par  la 
premiere  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration  et  en  terminant  par 
la  derniAre  page  qui  comporte  une  telle 
empreinte. 


The  last  recorded  frame  on  each  microfiche 
shall  contain  the  symbol  — '^>  (meaning  "CON- 
TINUED"), or  the  symbol  V  (meaning  "END"), 
whichever  applies. 


Un  des  symboles  suivants  apparattra  sur  la 
dernlAre  image  de  cheque  microfiche,  selon  Ie 
cas:  Ie  symbols  — ►  signifie  "A  SUIVRE",  Ie 
symbols  V  signifie  "FIN". 


IVIaps,  plates,  charts,  etc..  may  be  filmed  at 
different  reduction  ratios.  Those  too  large  to  be 
entirely  included  in  one  exposure  are  filmed 
beginning  in  the  upper  left  hand  corner,  left  to 
right  and  top  to  bottom,  as  many  frames  as 
required.  The  following  diagrams  illustrate  the 
method: 


Les  cartes,  planches,  tableaux,  etc.,  peuvent  6tre 
film6s  A  des  taux  de  reduction  diff^rents. 
Lorsque  Ie  document  est  trop  grand  pour  dtre 
reproduit  en  un  seul  clich6, 11  est  f  ilmi  A  partir 
de  I'angie  supArieur  gauche,  de  gauche  d  droite, 
et  de  haut  en  bas,  en  prenant  ie  nombre 
d'images  n^cessaire.  Les  diagrammes  suivants 
iilustrent  la  mithode. 


1 

2 

3 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

f^.^f 


-Q 


"V^AS    DAH' GWAII^ 


''*«, 


■^^^ 


A^     SPELLING-BOOK   < 


in  tho 


^•. 


V 


*>. 


SENECA    LANGUAGE;     ^^k^'^    "' 


S    J*""' 


lylth  Dngli  h  d^  fi  utions." 

•    a. 


7 
J  .-'«' 


'  \  - 


T  wwyMwnc  l^itli amttmUmti^.l^t^^ ^ 


;-^-'vv *"•■'. .  *■ 


'^.    !k 


X" 


X 


^-fe--,  /Ji 


'Ml 


,^' 


.^^: 


■'  ! 


"il 


Ipuflfalo-Creek  Reservation, 

Mission  Press, 

•*- 

-,^v^^> 

.^ 


■r.:ni^^mmm9im' 


t. 


t 


.i 


^'' 


'#^1 


F.XPLANATIOxX  FOR  ENGLISH  READERS. 

It  is  absDlutely   nec333ary  for   English  roaders   to  di'vost 
themselves  of  all  the  irregular  and  erroneous  notions  of  spel- 
ling contracted  by  using  the  imperfect  alphabet  of  the  English 
language,  and  to  remember  that,  in  spelling  Seneca,  the  same 
sound  is  uniformly  associated  with  each  character.     Hence, 
in  writing  the  language,  our  first  object  has  been  to  hear  cor- 
rectly the  several  sounds  of  which  each  word  is  composed,  in 
their  order,  and  then  to  represent  them  by  their  appropriate 
characters,  placed  in  the  same  order.     The  anomalous  sounds 
of  the  English  are  so  oddly  expressed  by  combinations  of  char- 
acters, and  so  many  letters  are  introduced  which  have  no  honest 
relation  to  the  sounds,  that  most  pers:)ns  find  it  very  difficult  to 
lay  aside  their  bad  habits  and  inconsistencies  sufficiently  to  fol- 
low our  simple  truth-telling  system  of  orthography.     But  be  it 
always  remembered,  if  the  reader  will  take  pains  to  understand, 
and  is  able  to  enunciate,  the  sounds  represented  by  the  several 
characters,  and  will  distinctly  enunciate  them,  in  the  order  in 
which  they   are  located,  and  with  their  appropriate  relative 
degrees  of  forcQ  and  lime,  and  with  the  natural  cadence  and 
inflexion,  he  will  read  the  language  intelligibly,  and — abating 
the  errors  of  the  writer  and  of  the  printer — Avith  the  same  ac- 
curacy with  which  it  is  spoken  by  the  Indian  himself. .   He  may 
call  our  mode  bf  representing  certain  sounds  very  odd  ;  and, 
if  lie  will  not  forget  the  barb.irisms  of  English  spelling,  he 
certainly  will  do  s>.     But  no  matter  for  that :  if  he  will  only 
be  c;^ntent  to  pronounce  his  words  correctly,  as  they  are  made 
re-idy  to  his  liands,  and.  no  otherwise,  he  will  be  a  correct,  and, 
if  he  improve  his  t  «loat  rightly,  a  ]n'ofitable  reader  of  Sene- 
ci;  and  WT  h.tve  no  fears  of  his  condemning  our  system,  af- 
ter he  sh..ll  h  ivethorou^'hly  attained  the  right  use  of  his  ears, 
by  lisitoiiing  uttontivfely  to  the  Indian  mode  ot  speaking. 


I 


w 


\    ■il 


:»■' 


I      * 


*A*;"':;4rf-*J^<^^fe- 


The  number  of  sounds  in  tho  Indian,  with  our  present  knoi^- 
ledge  of  the  language  is  supposod  to  be  ^0,  as  follows  : 

Vowel     Sounds. 


e, 


ng  ill  the  Englisli  word 
if  )j  ft 


it 
It 

9t 

If 
ft 


» 

if 
if 
if 

ft 


a 
ii 
ft 

it 
ft 


they, 
bet 
Snjl 
hat. 

ni'ichine. 
hit. 
nbte. 


unlike  any  English  letter,  half 
way  between  'o'  in  note  und  'o'  in  move, 
as  in  the  Englisli  M'ord  'push,' or,  as  'o'  in  move. 
like  the  English  letter  u  in         but. 
Nasrilizocl  vo'."c»ls  ore  such  as  h.ive  the  pcculmr  nasal  twahg 
approximating  t6  tliC  sound  produ6i2j  by  jbining  the  ^letter  *iv 
to  a  vowel,  rpmomberirig  not  to  finish*  the  .soUiid  of  the  'n,'  but 
only  proceed  s.>  f  r  as  to  comniuiiicale  to  the'vQwcl  cndligh 
of  i  s  sound  to  nas  .lize  it.     They  u'rc  Uniibrii))y  denuteJ  by 'a 
mnrk  like  a  hyi:hen  (-),  pluc'/d  undemoatii  t.lie  vciwel,  .vS  *a,' 
*^','  'e?'   '<;»*  'U/' "Vi'    <^--     A  vowel  ^ouhd  of  this  sort  co- 
ming befoie  *g'or  'k,'  c  v.ilcsces  w  th  it,  as  in  the  English  wort! 
*long.'      This  word,  sp'^lt  ailerll'ie  Indian  fa,shiun,  Wv^iiUl  be 


'Young, 


would 


iong 

*l-a-g/  'Strong,'  wouli  bo  's-t-r-a-g.' 
be  written  'y-v  g-''  'i\'0:)k,'  MCiild  he  'm-v-k,'  &c.— 
drc.  It  is  very  importyrit  ibi"  tho  reader  or  writer  oi'  Se- 
neca to  rrgnrd  very  scru-^uSon^ly  this  d;sti:^.ction  between 
n.  sail  zed  ar,d  oti'ser  vowol^j.  for  tSe  mc-:ning  is  often  eiitiroiy 
dei.endeijt  upon  u,  and  there  arc;  many  nice  iiiod.lic-^tioiis  bf 
tl..e  feensc  wl.ich  cui  Le  given  in^no  other  way. 

D  \  p  h  t  h  o  n  g  s  . 


*i^ 


fti  ifie     T     m  pine, 

i'u  "        *u     "  pure. 

Thf^rr  aien^aBVc'cSes  where  t-.e English  be  rcr  \\ouM  sup- 
pose t'if.'  s.'Und  of  the  diplithong  t)  he  that  of   ai/'  out     cle  -r 
atirniiun  to  its  enunciat'on'di^cjA'crs  the  clcising  vowel  to   be 
or  'a, "as  in  Miac,'  w'nc'.i  h  s  been  often  written,  'n-a-i,' 


or  t'  e  fi]>t  syllabic  of  'g  ...i  hall/ winch  h-isofton  been  spelled 
'g  a-i-n-  -h.^  In  t],e  si<'>w  ..lui  fvihnji'i  pronunj-i-.tiin  of  In- 
dian, laot't  ^r  All  of  ti.t*  d.ihll.o.^^r^-  m.  y  be  pr  ■r>-r.-ij'j-'ep:iraie'J 


'^rM-'i 


^^  -^V»  . 


■■^ 


tMi'mm 


'^i.' 


fjrr.h'-^ 


e;J  bv'a 


iM  mp" 
cle .  r 


I 


(I 


chin, 
day, 


beech. 


into  tlieir  constituent  elements,  and  ey.ch  vowel  sounded  distinct- 
ly by  itself.  Hence,  it  has  not  been  deemed  necessary  to 
adopt  any  particulnr  nurk  to  designate  ihein  ;  Ci^eciully,'  since 
for  the  present,  and  until  the  itiassof  the  Indialis  shall  be  able 
to  read  their  language  fluently,  it  is  thought 'expedient  uni- 
formly to  insertia  space  botweenihe  syllables. 
T  he  c  o  n  s  o  rj  a  n  1 3  are: 
as  in  the  Kil^liah  woixl 

'»*  "  h'ut,  and  at  the 

end   of  syllables.  It    always  denotes  the 
rough  aspirate  to  be  the  closinc  sound, 
unlike  the  sound  of  any  English  letter. 
This  leHer  ndvcr  precedes  a   vowel:    following  one,   k 
■should  be  spoken  l)y  giving  the' Vowel  an  expk>siv'e  force,  and 
^breaking  it  off  suddenly,  in  such  amahncr  as  for  the  instant  to 
•  stop  the  breath  entirely,  as  weotton  hear  white  people  in  hastl- 
iy  pronoimbi.'Vg  the  inlejectionOh!  especially,  where  they  rd- 
ipeat  it  tievcral  times  in  rapid  succession,  in  indicating  to  a  chilU 
"that  it  is  doing  something  wrong.     This'sjund  is  very  abun- 
dant in  Seneca,  an(i,'iised  in  conjunction  with  certain  other  mo- 
dfecations,  the  mode  and  time  of  verbs,  and  various  other  clr- 
cun^stunces  are  den...tod  by  it.    'Often,  also,  it  fot*msthe  chief 
distinction  between  woitli  of  very   dissimilar  meanii^^.     Nt> 
onecjn  read  or  write  Seneca  intclligit'ly,  who  does  not  pay  the 
strictest  attention  to  tins  character,  and  avoid  confounding  it  WitJi 
•the  rough  aspirate  of  the  common  li.' 


\ 


n 


h 

U 
w, 

.    ■>'» 
The  letters  :*j,'   »"v,'. 


s  intlie  Engliiih  word        job. 


(4 

n 
(( 
n 
(i 


4( 

u 
(( 


king, 
■no, 
slin, 
t:je, 
we. 
■  vender. 


'tak'e. 
on. 

dose. 


n 
ti 
it 

ii 

and  'v,'  are  heard  only  before  vowels, 

.-ii;.',]illy  softened,-  so  as  almost  to 


and  cii.'is  generally,  though  viot  always  f;o.      The- letter 
*is,  in  a'very   few  in^;tancos, 

resemble  tiie  suundof  'z'  in  Englit,h.     it  .'s  Am  coinu-on,  la 
scuiie  litighb-jurhO'jds,  to  give  it  a  sort  of  ks^.ir.g  s.our*d,  ap- 


■1 


i%-A^..y..A'M 


l-'^id 


^,jr,T-lB™»»*-"--« 


' 


I 


r.-!.- 


w 


proaching  to  that  of  *t)r'  in  tho  English    word   thoo,  and 
soinetiuies  hard,  us  in  'tiiick,'  'thin.' 

Tht^ro  arc  several  combinations  ol  sounds  not  used  in  the  En- 
glish language,  which  sometimes  greatly  embarrass  the  learner 
oflnaian  orthograjihy,  sintl  tiiercrore  need  particular  attention  : 
Kuch  ns  the  roiif^li  aspirated  sound  of  *h'  following  the  letters 
%'  %'  and  *v'  following  'd,'  'p,'  %'  'n/  %'  &c. ;  as  'she/ 
'shti,'  *sha,'  *.sho,'  v*^c.,  whore  the  's'  and  'h'  are  sounded  sep'a- 
rately,  and  notasinlho  I'wijijlish  words  'siiow,'  'shake  ;'  'tao/ 
*thr»,'  'tha,'  'tho,'  where  the  't' and  Mr  are  sou;ded  separately, 
and  not  as  in  the  English  words  *thaw,'  Mhank,'  nor  as  in 
*thine,'  'thou/iVc.  This  peculiarity  has  someli  nes  been  do- 
noted  In  inserting;  an  aposttophe  between  tho  's,'  or  't/and  'h/ 
thus :  Mi-o  ho,'  's-h-o  s'ho  ;'  'h-o  ho,'  't-h-o  t'ho,"  &:c  ',  but 
wo  have  deemed  the  use  of  the  apostrophe  unnecessary,  inasH 
much  as  the  English  sound  of  *th'  m  Hliin,'  'thee,'  &c  ,  is  ne- 
ver found  in  Seneca  except  in  c  ises  where  's,'  is  corruptiul 
by  a  lisping  mode  of  .speaking,  and,  the  English  sound  of  'sh'  is 
uniformly  represented  in  Indian  by  its  natural  signs  'sy,'  as 
•y-e  ye,'  's-y-e  sye,'  (English  sha  ;)  *y-oyo,'  's-y-o  syo,  (En- 
glish show),  &-C.  In  like  minncr  'dye,'  'dyw,'  'dya,'  'dyo,' 
tV.c.  ;  'gye,'  'gy:>,'  *gya/  'gvo,'  iS.'C. ;  'kye,'  Mcya,'  'kya,' 
*kyo,''  &c.  ;  *nye,'  'nya,'  'nya,'  'nyo,'  &c.,  arc  all  pronounced 
by  giving  to  each  letter  its  natural  and  legitimate  sound  in  tho 
place  wher«  it  is  located.  So,  also,  in  all  other  cases,  it  has 
been  our  aim  toannlyze  cr.mpound  s  nnids,  and  represent  them 
by  tho  represent  itives  of  their  simple  elements.  In  some  ca- 
pes thrcrw^r  fo'.ir  consonants  will  be  f nmd  t^)  precede'  a  vowel 
in  the  sanievyluihie.  in  English  si>me  one  or  mon^  of  them 
v  ukl  bi^  silent.,  but  there  are  no  silmt  letters  in  the  Indian. 
*Sgyo,'  'y^yo,-  'skya,'  'snyu,'  'sgwa,'  'skwu,'  'tga,'  &c.,  have 
rv<M-y  loiter  sounded  distinctly,  in  its  place.  A  litile  practico 
vill  mrike  all  such  coinbin-itions  perfectly  ciisy  and  natural. 

It  is  nottr)be  supposerl  that  witii  ouv  impeit'cct  kuAvledgeof 
f"ei  cca,  we  liave  dis-covoreu  and  mnrked  accnidtely  all  the  po- 
culiai  itics  of  the  language.  It  is  i;omctimes,  nl^o,  very  ditlicult 
to  decide  on  the  correct  usage,  wheie  there  are  ditfcionces  of 
pi'onunciftlion  nmor.g  the  Indians.  In  ^uch  cases  we  havo 
fcoiiglu  for  the  pure  Senecain  c  ntradistinction  from  the  idijms 
of  Al(jha\vk,  Cay  uga,  Onaudaga,  vStc,  and  for  Seneoi  us  spo- 


T^m^mf/f    ■"■■'.- 


k'^n  by  tb*>  olHnjnn,  w1io«(?  hahjts  \vp-p  rirmnJ  pr<»vious  to  tbw 
intHK-liictioii  of  I'itiplish  idn-is.  ajul  nio  li"fi<*itionsof  'u]o  us,  nm'">n^ 
ihe  people.     It  i.s  not  protruded  th:xtrK)rtV)m  is  |of>  for  fnturft 
improvpDiont.     It  would  \-)o  vory  stirmpo  If  much  sliould  not 
ultimntcly  b(MlfM'('^•s  u'v.      Siinrf?'\sfioii5J  (if  noorind  ri<lditions  or 
aJl*»ratioii.s  will,  thoroforc  b"  th..iikfidl;,  riH'oivpd  /ind  iliily  coii- 
eidnrefl ;  and  wlirrev(M'  tlio  c  rn>(;t  anulysis  of  thn   Uingn-igo 
jshnll  decido  in  tlioir  I'lvou!-,  ihoy  will  ho  n»  st  gladly  adopted. 
It  has  bnou  nbjoctrtl  to  tluj  system  of  orlliograpliy  which 
we   ha>o  ad.')ptfd,  thfit  it    has  a  teiid;^ne.y   1o  cmh  ,rni.s.s    tho 
joarnor  by  nsing  English  letters  wifh  Fiencli  (  r  (iernmn  sounds 
attached  to  the  vowels.     It  should  ho  ieci)llccl(Hl,  however,  that 
each  Knglish  vowel  has  sf)  many  sounds  that  they  could  not  be 
retained  without  intrndiK'.ing  strange  jargon  into  the  Sent  ex 
AA'c!  have  given  no  now  sound  to  any  letter.     VVe  have  foil  nv- 
ed  some  one  sound  of  the  English  vowel  in  every  cas?.  and  re- 
jected from  necessity  all  the  others.     In  deciding  which  to  fol- 
low and  which  to  reject,  wo  have  been  influenced  mainly  by 
the  fact  that  tho  Hon.  T.  Pickering's  mode  of  representing  tho 
vowel  sounds,  which,  in  the  main,  we  have  adopted,  has  boeu 
generally  introduced  among  the  Indians  of  the  continent,  wher- 
ever their  languages  have  been  rcdi'ced  to  writing,  is  approved 
by  t  e  American  Board,  and  corresponds  more  closely  than  any 
other  mode  of  notation,  with  the  usages  of  the  whole  civilized 
world,  and  no  objection  can  be  brought  against  it  wiiich  Nviil 
not  bear  with  equal  force  agnins   every  other   system  which 
employs  the  English  letters.      Besides,  many  oi  the  Indians 
are  already  in  some  degree  familiar  with  this  system;  a  much 
larger  number  than  arc  familiar  with  any  other   ;  and   no 
other  system  can  become  adapted  to  the  correct  representa- 
tion of  the  Seneca  langu  ige,  on  paper  without  adopting  as  ma- 
ny variutions  from  the  common  Englisb  os  Mr.  Pickering  and 
his  followers  have  done-     Those  who  have  attempted  to  write 
in  other  ways,  are  coniinwally  finding  new  marks  necr>ssary, 
and  the  more  they  write  the  more  marks  they  will  need,  till  they 
have  a  character  exclusively  apj)ropriated   to  each  of    tho 
sounds  contained  in  the  spoken  language.     Then,  and  not  till 
then,  will  their  systems  have  a  claim  to  be  regarded  perfect 
VVe  have  endeavoured,  in  adopting  Mr.  Pickering's  system,  i^ 
pake  in  tho  putaet,  all  the  additions  necessgiry,  to  Uiluj>l>t  to  uU 


■^. 


■■■ii 


tMmi 


\ 


I  - 


■' 


i 


'^ 

t 

K 


I 
I  t 


,  »,i  »• 


t|.*».or'p'?nri!-'Rof't'"'^  Tr'^T"'.  st  f.fl  to  prrvort  ns  fir  r<ifr)«»c!» 
Mr,  t'.f!  r.poo.'spilvor  rit(i-f»  rllrv"*^,}-;^:,     Till,  lir  nrvr-r,  n  sft- 
t;iffl  h'l^it  o/  nncijir  ^h-'i"?  •r'Qn  c.'>!iii>li;hf/',  »>''.f^;*o  will-,  ;^^•^.""^l■^'^ 
Ijn  v.ivintion;-  in  or!i;npi'n['hy  cnv-vspoiidrng  ^v•it■;l  tJu?  v:irj<tu.i. 
Tt'O'lr,'!  in  wliich  din'Tcnt   ir  flyii'iinls  s^prrik  or  hoarll.o.  nnrno. 
Morfl ;  hilt  ti;f.-o  \\irintion5i  •.j'ill  ocov".;  i(jn  no  rorioii?i  incoiivrn-. 
irvro  to  thf  iriuloi',  any'irinr^  fh.in  to  i\.r.  lirovrr  of  a  fprrch, 
r>r  convorKntion  wlicrc;  Ilir_v  (rcnr  in  the  sj>oI{on  l.'iiigij'iG:r\ 
'J  Iip  rcficicr  who  pmnonnccsfis  \bc.  wordx  nrc  "v/ri'.tcn,  find  tlift. 
wrJtei- who  writs  thorn  nricumtol}-  r.s  thoy  fire  f:[)ol<rn,  v;ill 
Voili  Ix'Siiftlciontly  corj-r-i  lor  rll  [uirpfsr?!  of  prnctjcnl  i.tility. 
It  nv\y  not  bo  jmpj'opr'j',  hnr.e  to  oxiircsf*  our  airnnsl  h*  j.p, 
t^mta])  w}jo  h.T<e  nnythinnr  to  do  wiih  Indinns,  and  vyho  arccu-. 
pid.)lo  of  ofiinvcialiMg  l!io  vdue  of  n  wvitlon  laiigiuige,  willi 
jitrciuiously  oxcrt  thcnirc'vc^,  tohrifiicn  forwfnd  the  time  ulieii 
Qvory  liidinn  shall  be  fully  able  to.o.xpv.css  hi.s  o\j:n  fJiovights. 
9n  papQr,  and  derive  his  full    measure  of  advantage  from  llio. 
vritleil  thoughtfi  of  r^tjierv,  and  e^ipociaily   from  the  written, 
\\'()rd  of  (Jod,  to  whoso  blesr.ing  these  incipient,  efFjrts  to  ao. 
Qf tmplifih  so  desirable  an  object,  are  humbly  and  earnestly  com- 


-o^Jo- 


KOTE., 
To  thos<»  who  may  bo  inclined  to  cr'ticlse  the  sty^e  of' 
<>ur  printing,  we  would  remark,  that,  we  have  no  Italic  type, 
jjind  but  one  size  of  Roman  letter..    Several  of  tha  accenticd 
capitis,  also,  arc  wanting,  puuehcs  not  l.iaving  been  cutj  for. 
tjhem  wliien  the  accented  type  was  prepared^  in  Bosl-orj,  soma. 
years  since  for  prii ii/iiig  Senec-i..    This'  wiJl  explain  the  breaks 
in  thecoluainof  capiliib,  (in  the  alphabet,)  and  many  other, 
things  which  pvinters  would  deem  irregularities.     To  furnish, 
Qurselyes  with  Italic,  and  another  size  of  Roman,  witji  the  cap-, 
itals  for  eacl),  sufiicient  for  our  little  establishment,  would  rc- 
quiraal?out  ^150,  b-^fore  the  type   could  be  cast,  an^  the, 
whole  (expense  would  vary  little  from  #400  ;  for  the  v^'ont  of 
which*  we  are  obliged  to  forego  the  advanta^ges  of  beauty  an4 
yari^ty  in  the  sty \e  and  execution  of  ou;*  work,  and  maketho^ 
^es^  >jre  C9A  c^  the  fiaciiitita  with  which  we  ax^  provided^    ' 


'▼r' 


-i.  ■■'■' 


ALPHABET. 


Small  lottors. 

a 
& 

ft 
4 

• 

i 
I 

o 
6 
Q 

u 

U 
V 

V 

ch 
d 

g 
h 
h 

J 

.      k 

n 
s 
t 
w 

y 


Capitals 

Round  as 

heard   in 

Indian       &; 

English. 

A 

di. 

fall. 

A 

griih. 

hatt 

4 

ktn  g3ll 

want,     ^n'iiv]y.) 

I 

ni  gi. 

punt,      (nearly.) 

E 

ne. 

thoy. 

— 

goh. 

bet. 

I 

nill. 

machine. 

— 

nlk  hull. 

hit. 

o 

do  gas. 

note.    * 

— 

haksjt. 

move     (nearly.) 

o 

so. 

tone,      (nearly.) 

u 

kuii. 

push. 

— 

de  gyiuh* 

tune,      (nearly.) 

V 

gvs  dvk. 

but. 

— 

4  wv  gyandak.  bunt,      (nearly.) 

CH 

chill  dyoh. 

chin.       ''beech.) 

D 

do,  jus  had. 

day,  add. 

G 

gas. 

go,  log. 

H 

nik  huh, 

hat. 

H 

neli. 

oh! 

J 

ja  dirk. 

job. 

K 

kuh,  wah'dak. 

king,  take. 

N 

nc,  sot  hon  dac 

.  no,  on. 

S 

sah,  is. 

sun,  dose. 

T 

tah  ahj'^skat. 

toe,  at. 

W 

wa  doh. 

we. 

Y 

ye  Qh. 

yonder. 

D 

ipht  hongs. 

ai 

gai  wi  yu. 

pin&. 

iu 

diu  i  wah. 

pure. 

"i 


•^ 


\ 


.^3^- 


.  4i5.*.»i*;' 


^P^f' "■,  "  ■■.,^' -^r- '"^"^ ''■^T^  '  ■ 


i)^ 


a, 
O! 

ah, 

4h, 

da, 

da! 

do! 

do? 

he, 

ho! 
ho! 

m. 

is, 

n|l 

ne, 

ne, 

ne, 

no, 

si! 


1» 

LESSON  11. 

Words   of   one    syllable* 

yes. 

"(the  same  in  both  languages.) 

on  the  part  of. 

it  seems. 

there,  then,  now. 

there  !  there  now  ! 

here!  how!  how  much!  how  many! 

how  much  ?  how  many  ? 

(a  syllable  having  the  force  of  the 

verb  *to  be ') 
because  of,  on  account  of,  for  that, 

where, 
look  !  look  yonder ! 
stop  !  don't  do  that. 
I,  me,  we,  us. 
thou,  you. 

look  here !  behold  !  see  this ! 
yes,  that  is  it. 
the,  that,  this, 
place  where, 
perhaps,  probably, 
look  !  soe  there ! 


■i'  m . 


A    ' 


w 


aih, 

dih, 

gas, 

gah  ? 

gah,  or  gaah, 

geh, 


gwc 


heh, 
fcuh. 


LESSON  1 1 1. 

again. 

but,  and,  otherwise,  now,  then, 
it  is  so  commonly,  or  habitually, 
is  it  so  ? 

very,  exceedingly, 
place  where. 

look  here  I  stop  !  turn  this  way !  at- 
tend to  me ! 
some,  a  part  of. 
that,  for  that,  where,  because, 
and. 


.  'r,\i.^ 


:%"«/»•'•'■■*',;    ''■■•?''  >e^-"V  "'    "'■'V'';    "ir-    •'Ty-i'^'^f '""">•'' -'^f^   "■'  "(    -^, 


■^^%--' 


nae, 

n|h, 

neh, 
neh, 
nih, 

nis, 

sah, 
tuh, 
wis, 
gwall, 


gwah  ! 
gwali, 
haoJi ! 

neeh, 

neeJi, 

nooh, 

vaeh, 

skast 

skat, 

nyiuh, 

nyiuh  ! 

tvvunt, 


a  gwirs . 
a  ime'  1 
ah'soh, 
3'yek, 


11 

LESSON  IV. 

rather,  rather  than,  more  than,  on  the 
other  hand,  on  the  other  pait. 
(euphonism  of  *neh,'  'nah  ih  ah/  I 
for  my  part.) 

the,  that,  this. 

that,  in  order  that. 

ffor  *neh  ih,'  or  'nah  ih.')  I,  me, 
we,  us. 

(for  'neh  is,'  or  'nah  is.')  Thou, 
thee,  ye,  yoiu 

three. 

(a  response.)     Well,  true,  jast  so. 

five. 

all  about,  everywhere,  or  in  respect  to 
everything,  promiscuously,  ge- 
nerally. 

here  !  take  this  ! 

red-Jieaded  wood-pecker. 

come  on  !  exert  yourself,  start ! — go- 
ahead. 

this,  that,  the  very  thing. 

yes,  that  is  it. 

perhaps,  probably. 

first,  before,  in  the  first  placs. 

right,  good,  proper. 

one. 

well,  just  so, 

come  on  !    g3  aliead ! 

(the  common  duck.) 

LESSON  V. 

Words   of    two   syllables. 

very. 

why  1 

more,  once  more,  yet,  Et'll. 

she  v/ill  eat 


v 


".(■y/-T(«:'*.;i 


j.'^",;sr'" . 


^'.I^'^3•^*"T■.■•.■^  . 


I 


ak  sot', 
U'ak, 
agek', 
a  ak', 
a  gih', 
ageh'! 

a  gyah', 
chih'dygli, 
chi  es,' 

chit'hehs, 

chi'yaJis, 

chi'gyalls, 

chis'nah, 


chisg'yah, 

da  gus', 
da  gyoh' 
da  joh', 
dak  iiont', 
dek  ni', 
dyut  gont/ 
dyo'gwah,  or 
dyo'gueh, 
de  sek,' 
dah  sek', 

das  ha', 
dak  ha', 
da  goh', 


12 

LESSON  VL 

my  grand  mother,  (speaking  to  her.) 

lie  will  eat. 

that  she  may  eat. 

that  ho  may  eat, 

(ciy  of  pain.) 

(an  exclamation  when  a  mistake    13 

made.) 
(exclamation  of  a  person  in  pain.) 
thou  art  there,  thou  art  present, 
when  he  was  tarrying  here  or  there, 

or  going  about, 
when  he  was  there,  tarrying  or  going 

about, 
when  she  was  tarrying  or  going  about 

here  or  there, 
wlien  she  was  there,  tarrying  there, 

or  going  about  there, 
(expression  of  contempt,  used  by  men.) 

LESSON  vn. 

(expression    of    contempt  used   by 

women.) 
cat. 

give  us. 
come  in. 
give  me  to  eat. 
two. 
always, 
dya'gwah,  if,  if  it  be  so. 
we  people, 
pick  it  up. 
you  may  pick  it  up,  or  you  will  pick 

or  take  it  up. 
hand  it  to  rac. 
1  brought  it. 
give  it  to  me. 
eight. 


1 


1 


-^ 


■■\ 


■m 


;■'?   'W' 


to  her.) 


istakc    is 

pain.) 
It. 
or  there, 

or  going 

ing  about 

ng  there, 

by  men.) 

used   by 


will  pick 


dyuh  dQh'i 
dis  dat', 
do  ga', 
do  gas', 
ga  ahs', 
ga  nyuh', 
ga  oh', 
ga  oh', 
gat  gaah', 
gih'  oh, 
girs  dirk, 
gwah  nih', 
gwis'gwis', 
ga  hah', 
gah'nah, 
go  vvek', 
girs  nah', 
gajih', 


gaa  nnh, 
ga'yah, 
ga'ih, 
gan'joh, 
ga  das', 
go'wah, 
goh  geh', 
gak'wah, 
ga  \va', 
gan  doh', 
ga  Qh', 
ga  doh', 
gah'dyoh, 
ga  snih', 
gih'shah, 
gih'dyoh, 


LESSON  Mil. 

nine. 

rise  up. 

togetl)er. 

truly,  yes  it  is  so  indeed. 

it  ovei  takes,  or  outstrips. 

wild  animal. 

this  way. 

air,  gas,  any  aeriform  fluid. 

either. 

it  is  said. 

useful. 

our  father,  (speaking  to  him.) 

hog. 

wind,  air  in  motion. 

arrow. 

agent,  prince,  or  king. 

bJirk  of  a  tree  or  shrub. 

come  here. 

LESSON  LX. 

hymn  or  song. 

it  is  here,  there  is  some,  it  has. 

standing  tree. 

fish. 

thick. 

her  own,  it  is  hers. 

quick !  hasten  ! 

food,  provision. 

she  said. 

it  signifies,  it  means. 

feminine  gender  of  animals. 

I  say. 

it  is  there.  )applied  to  animals.) 

come  here,  (dual  and  plural.) 

ferhaps. 
am  dtting  here,  I  live  here  or  here, 
J  eim  present. 


/ 


'^t">"-TO;^."  v^>:  i,v--     r,  ■  "J,  rjj^^ 


:-Y>->'V*'7"'^" 


14 


.i 

1 


goiiyo, 
go'deh, 
gut'goh, 
gi'tloh, 
gis  heris', 
gos  hehs', 
gos  hells', 
girs  heTi', 
gxrs  helis', 
Jiah  nih', 
hali'nih, 
hoJi'nih, 
ha  wa', 
lia'doh, 
ho'wch, 
hah  J  ih, 

hak's5t, 


ho  yo', 
hah'dyoh, 

ho  na', 

haeh'gwah, 

lie'gwa, 

het'gah, 

ho'gwa, 

ho  nyo', 

hanyos', 

hoh  sot', 

hoh  sa', 

ho'doh, 

ho'ga, 

hoh'ga, 

heTi'g4, 

hih'nsh, 


LESSON  X. 

slie  is  killed,  or  she  has  killed, 
lier  grand  daughter.       • 
witch,  she  is  a  witch. 
I  mean. 
I  am  chasinff. 
I  am  chasmg  you. 

it  is  chasing  her,  or  she  is  chasing  her. 
it  is  chasing. 

it  is  in  the  habit  of  chasing, 
my  father,  (speaking  to  him.) 
my  father,  (speaking  of  him.) 
his  father, 
he  said, 
he  says. 

out  there,  yonder. 

my  brother  older  than  myself,  (speak- 
ing of  him.) 
my  grand-father,  (speaking  of  him.) 

LESSON  XI. 

he  has  arrived. 

he  is  present,    (here  or   there,)  he 

resides, 
they  said, 
also. 
towards, 
high, 

yonder,  off  this  way,  or  that, 
he  has  killed, 
butcher,  he  is  wont  to  kill, 
his  grandfather, 
he  is  fat. 
he  means  him. 
he  has  seen. 

his  brother  younger  than  himself, 
my  brother  younger  than  myself, 
the  thunderer,  (an  imaginary  being.) 


.:M 


'% 


/^^a'^st^:"-":  ..:'"•;■ 


ho'goh, 

ho'wi, 

ho'yah, 

ho'wah, 

hoh'gyoh, 

1  yos, 

1  wi, 
i  jeh', 
ih  neh', 
iget', 

i  yahs', 
ih  sells, 
jadirk', 

iKgi, 

Jiyah', 
JagQh', 


je  at', 
JQ'gweh, 
je'na, 
ji  yeh', 
jih  sas', 
jih  is'  ? 
jah'ah, 
jat'gah, 

jut'hoh, 
jus'daat, 
jus'had, 
juh'nyaat, 
ja'doh, 
jis'nyet, 
ji  nyuh', 
jih  yak', 


15 

LESSON  XII. 

he  is  eating,  he  ate. 

he  has  given  him. 

he  has  it. 

his  own. 

when  I  came,  or  arrived. 

blanket. 

long. 

I  think. 

wake  up. 

you  was  with  me. 

I  stand. 

there  is  some,  it  is  there,  it  is  in  it. 

she  walks. 

thou  art  walking. 

seven. 

ghost,  apparition. 

dog. 

go  ahead. 

LESSON  XIII. 

use,  do  thou  make  use  of. 

you  people. 

take  it. 

wake  up. 

you  two  are  seeking. 

is  it  sore  ?  do  you  ache  1 

thou  little  one. 

do  you  two  give  it  up,  leave  it,   or 

let  it  go. 
December, 
one  drop, 
one  winter, 
one  inch, 
you'two  say. 
you  two  speak, 
you  two  kill, 
you  shoot  or  throw. 


:^ 


"wr.^ 


4, 


¥ 


I., 


jirs'het, 

ke'sah, 

ke'noh, 

keh'ga, 

ke'das, 

khe'yQh, 

kna'geh, 

kiia'gek, 

kni'yad, 

kheli'dyQQh, 

kna'ye, 

na'ya, 

na'vveh, 

ua  gyeli', 

nan'dah, 

raga', 

naan'dahi 

ne  gW, 


neh'  dih, 

neeh'gwah, 

neh  gvva', 

neh  huh', 

neh'huh, 

neli  ho', 

ne'ne, 

neh'kuh, 

nik'huh, 

no'gweh, 

noo'gweh, 

noh'go, 

noh'gah, 

no  gyeh' 

no  nah, 

noli  sgwais', 

Byagwaih', 


LESSON  XIV, 

you  Iwo'count. 

my  daughter-in-law. 

my  step-daughter. 

my  sister  younger  than  myself. 

I  pity  her. 

let  me  give  her. 

I  dwell,  or  abide. 

I  dwelt,  or  abode. 

let  me  confirm,  tie,  draw  tight. 

ht  mc  put,  place,  or  locate,  her. 

I  am  proud. 

it  seems,  it  appears  so. 

it  might  think. 

I  may,  or  might  do. 

this,  this  is  it. 

this,  this  thing,  this  one. 

famine,  a  wasting  away. 

it  is  this,  this  is  the  one. 

LESSON  XV. 

but  this,  but  that. 

also,  furthermare, 

but,  but  on  the  other  hand. 

it  is  so,  that  is  it, 

verily,  truly,  yes. 

stop,  be  still,  do  not  do  it. 

the  thing  which,  that  one,  that. 

and  that,  and  this. 

here,  in  this  place. 

man,  mankind. 

the  man,  that  man. 

into,  inward. 

behind,  after,  afterwards. 

in  tlie  house,  within. 

now,  when. 

toad. 

bear. 


ni'ne 


\i 


■■' ■W 


n^  deh'f 
ni'nehs, 
neh'shQ, 
no'yali, 
noh'y&h, 
noh  yWt 
ne'yioh, 
o  nih', 
o  nah', 
odok'f 
o  dlt', 
oha', 
6s  deli', 
o  daunt', 
oh  sih', 
oh  gih', 

Ogi', 
ok  he', 


oh  chTs', 
oh  s'^s', 
o  yah', 
0  gvveh', 
6t  gah', 
ch'dyont, 
ttgoh', 
6t  ggk', 
o  yah', 
oh  gah', 
ot'gl, 
oh  sa'  > 
ot  gih', 
6t  gjs', 
bs  nah', 
oh  skas', 


LESSON   XVI. 

day,  daytime. 

they  two  are  walking  together. 

only. 

another. 

my  mother,  ^speaking  of  her.) 

my  mother,  (speaking  to  her.) 

his  or  her  companion. 

now. 

oil. 

the  end. 

rough. 

dry. 

heavy. 

wretched. 

you  say. 

isay. 

or. 

I  cut. 

LESSON  xvn. 

you  mix  together. 

you  had  the  use  of  it 

another. 

person. 

noiso,  sound  ;  it  makes  a  sound. 

fearful,  it  is  fearful. 

poison,  it  is  poison. 

it  was  poison. 

fruit. 

powder,  dust,  ashes. 

pus,  putrid  matter. 

fat,  it  is  fat. 

ugly  looking  thing. 

raw,  it  is  raw. 

barkofatreo. 

good,  convenient. 


.»._, 


s4  nQh', 
skoh  iik'f 
syi  gwa', 

sa'y4ft» 
sa  ye', 
sa'  dQh, 
sat  glh', 
sn^h  het't 
swih  saak', 
ska  nQh', 
swa'doh, 
swa'n^ll, 
she  ygh', 
sah'gwah, 
sa  gyoh', 
8a  gyeh', 
sa  ja', 


sya'sQh, 

sah'3'.t, 
sah'jih, 
sj,'  guh, 
soh  nek', 
sa'  wah, 
syall  di', 
sya'dQ, 
sQ'eh, 
syi'Qh, 
sa'ga, 

£0  VVtik', 

se  na', 
sQh  heh', 
sek'doh, 
soh'gali, 
sheh  dyg^h', 


H 

LESSON  XVIII. 

you  must  not. 

frog. 

farther. 

thou  hast. 

thou  art  awake. 

thcu  Slyest. 

get  up,  rise  then. 

fill  U[),  du  thou  fill. 

seek  ye. 

well,  in  health. 

you  say. 

thy  word. 

give  to  her. 

rather  preferable. 

I  have  returned. 

I  have  awaked  again. 

put  it  beck  again, 

LESSON  XIX. 

thou  art  called. 

thy  grandfather. 

th}'-  sister  older  than  thys3lf. 

choosL'4  thcu,  select. 

tuko  it  away,  or  get  out  of  the  way. 

it  is  thine. 

thyself  alone,  by  thyself. 

writ3  t()en. 

night,  nigbt  time. 

thou  vv'om.in. 

thou  hr.ot  found  it,  or  seen. 

duck. 

skunk. 

thou  li\  est,  thy  life. 

cxamiiiG  thou  it,  ta.stc  it,  feel  it. 

thy  sister  younger  than  thyself. 

put  her,  j.'hce  her  there. 


t 


,</'■■•- ,- 


tih'4h. 

ta'sck, 

ta'set, 

ta'sye, 

ta'syeh, 

teh'gl, 

te'dah, 

teh'dwehs, 

tga'gont, 

tga'yih, 

tgehs'gwah, 

tha  wa', 

thah  nont', 

ihlh'dyoh, 


to  hah', 
wa  ak', 
vvah  ek', 
wa'gQh, 
wa'uoh, 
wa  ah\ 
wah  ah', 
wa'eh, 

was  guh', 
wak  ah', 
wah'jih, 


was'tok, 
wa  Bch', 


If 

LESSON  XX. 

no,  not. 

thou  ma  vest  or  must  not  eat. 

thou  mayes- 1  or  must  not  go  there. 

tljuu  maye.st  or  mu'jt  not  do  it. 

thou  may  est  or  must  not  wake. 

ifitweiL',  if  it  had  been. 

yesterday. 

if  I  h^d  boon  there  with  you. 

mutt,  musl  be  so,  doubtless. 

there  i.s  some  there. 

I  w.  s  t'lero. 

he  s  J  id,  ho  replied,  he  spoke,      (used 

of  n  rors  n  at  a  distance.) 
he  is  in.     (spoken  of  a  place  or  thing 

at  a  dihtancc.) 
he  is  there,   %iU  there,  or  is  present 

there. 

LESSO??  XXI. 

almost,  nearly. 

ho  ate. 

she  ate. 

victuals,  food. 

it  says. 

ho  said. 

she  thought- 
first,  t'lea  fust,  a    little  while  ago, 
ju&t  now. 

a  floriting  bridge. 

one  side,  by  l!iO  side. 

just  now,  i\  little  while  ago.  (common- 
ly applied  to  the  part  of  the  day 
al  leady  past,  but  sometimes  used  of 
time  longer  ago.) 

Boston. 

new,  fresh. 


'4 


-^X' 


10 
LESSON  XXII. 


w4  aehfl'i 

ihey  go  together,  they  range,   they 

wander  about,   (spoken  of  ani- 

mals.) 

wan  dak', 

Saturday. 

wen'doh, 

Avhon. 

wesiih', 

much. 

we'nh, 

far,  far  dictant. 

wi'yu, 

gojd. 

wvs'ha, 

ten. 

ya'doh, 

thoy  two  say. 

yaik'neh, 

June. 

yack'jih, 

first,  before. 

ya'ch, 

first,  before,  then,  for  the  present. 

ya'wi. 

lie  has  given  ihee. 

yaih'sas, 

she  isseckinsr. 

yah'jih, 

thy  brother  older  than  thyself. 

yah'sjt, 

thy  grandfather. 

LESSON  XXIII. 

yah'nih, 

thy  father. 

yah'seh, 

they  two  arc  cousins. 

ye'gah, 

she  sees. 

yeh'dyoh, 

she  sits,  she  is  here  or  there. 

yeh'nont, 

she  is  in,  she  is  present. 

ye'ih, 

six. 

ye'oh, 

woman,  female. 

yTs'nyiet, 

let  her  speak. 

yoh'heh, 

it  lives,  she  lives. 

yon'dob, 

she  says. 

yoh'hek, 

let  it  live. 

ya'wak, 

thou  who  art  the  son  of,  or  thou  who 

art  his  son. 

yon  dya'. 

let  her  sit  down. 

yaQk'hall, 

she  understands,  or  hears. 

yiQh'tali, 

her  ear. 

yuk  ha^, 

it  leaks  or  drops. 

21 


a  gtrs'hus, 
a  gTs'heh, 
a  geh'Qh, 
ak'ni  gont, 
a  nah  aut'  ? 
a  do'gah, 
a'so  dyaak, 

a'dih  gwah, 
o'di  dak, 
a'vva  dgh, 
a'gl  ak, 
a'sohhek, 
a'sls  heh, 


ae'sih  sak» 
a'yoh  hek, 
a  gwi'yah, 
g,gh'e  sirt, 
a  na  gye'  ? 
a  gye'wus, 

a'osgah, 
a'g^nah, 

a'o  nih, 
a'yek  doh, 

a'gek  doh, 
a'ga  doh, 
a  ga'dghs, 


Words   of   tliiec   byUablo*. 

LESSON  XXIV. 

I  romeruljcr. 

it  is  clju.sing  inc. 

I  thouglit. 

1  am  wise,  tliore  is  mind  in  mo. 

what  i  what  is  it  ? 

axo. 

tliou  mayest  or  must  raise  it  or  bring  it. 

up,  or  cause  it  lo  grow, 
whellicr. 

they  may  or  must  staiid  up. 
it  luuv  or  must  become, 
it  may  or  must  be. 
lliou  mayest  or  must  live. 
thou  mayost  or  must  follow,  chase  or 

piuoue. 

LESSON  XXV. 

thou  mayost  or  must  seek. 

she  or  it  may  or  must  live. 

my  ofl'spj'ing,  j)rogeny. 

it  is  matter  for  rejoicing. 

what  shall  I  do  ? 

I  am  discoiirngod.   (spoken  in  regard 

to  lirjding  what  one  is  looking  for) 
alone,  without  mixture, 
past  Lcnse  of  "a  ga  nk,"  it  had  been, 

it  might  havo  been, 
he  mav  or  must  make, 
she  may  or  muat  examine,  feel,  taste, 

touch. 
I  may  or  must  examine,  &c. 
1  nwv  become,  be  healed.     • 
1  may  continually,  or  habitually,  or 

frequently  becQme,  d;c. 


u'sya  (\i)tlf 
ak'nohsjt, 
o'sek  sek, 

jfpeh'sekt 

a  gugwuh, 
n  get' hah, 
a  gct'hak, 
n  go'gah, 
aclirs'huh, 
a  ge'goh, 
n'gusimh, 

a'ye  ygh, 
a' ye  is, 


91 

LESSON  XXVI. 

I  nan  nfraid,  I  nm  fearful. 

tliou  M  lyest  or  must  write. 

my  hou^o. 

thou  niuycst  or  must  cat,  or  kecj[ji  eat- 
ing in  future. 

iW^i  mayciit,  must  or  oughteit  to  bo 
travelling  or  going  about. 

1  have  chcsen. 

I  am  speaking,  talking,  discovering. 

I  was  speaking,  die. 

I  liavG  scon. 

handle,  bail  of  a  kettle. 

I  have  eaten,  I  am  eating. 

it  may,  ought,  or  might  consumCvfinlbh, 
i.^oup. 

she  mny,  tiught,  or  might  come. 

ho  may,  ought,  might,  or  must  do. 

LESSON  XXVII. 


4giat'gaTi, 
Q-'yohhek, 
a  ye'gah, 
4  want'his, 
4  vvan'dis, 
4  che'ygh, 
un  deh'khaah, 
iyg'hrnt, 
ghsa'dili, 
4  gis'nyiet, 
4  ont'gah, 
a  gye'naah, 
4' on  dak, 
4ye'£it, 
4  gat'his, 
^  si'ehf 
4k  sat'^, 


I;  1 


I  will  give  up,  leave,  or  forsake. 

it  will  livo. 

t'lie  v/ill  see. 

it  v'lil  rc-A)  veor  be  removed. 

it  v/ ill  prillt. 

give  it  to  her. 

belon^nng  tathe  day. 

toiuenuw. 

vou  '.vill  throw  it  away. 

I  will  speak. 

he  will  myQ  it  yj,. 

I  will  receive  it. 
he  will  stand  there, 
siie  will  overtake. 
I  v/ill  move  a  littlt. 
you  will  die. 
you  will  give  it  up^ 


1! 


.'iSi^Aii'- 


A  ga'yoh, 
4  ge'guh, 
&  gis'at, 
4  gi'eh, 
d  ga'at, 
4h  swa'at, 
4lj  swat'gall, 
4  swa'doh, 
&£  ^a'jQh, 
H  su  a'doh, 
i'li-.va'gah, 
4h  swa'vQh, 
4  wan'doh, 
4  ski'd4h, 
4  yaih'sak, 
4  on'yaak, 
4  y  is'at, 


4  gl'Qk, 
4g4'eli, 
4  gih'yaak, 
4h  sih'yaak, 
4  gi'yuh, 
ago'nyiuh, 
4  goh'yaak, 
4  ^irs'haih, 
4j5h'hek, 
4  jon'doh, 
4  je'yoh, 
4jis'nyiet, 
4o'g|h, 
4  yai'yeh, 
4ya'gxh, 
4ya'ok, 
4  sgus'ah, 


LiiBsoN  xxvni. 

it  will  come. 
I  wMl  pick  it  out 
I  will  iinkh  it  or  aso  it  up. 
I  'hall  die. 
it  will  [)%ss. 
you  will  ovortako. 
you  give  it  up. 
it  will  heal. 

it  will  be  or  become  again, 
thou  wilt  bo  or  locomo  again, 
you  will  seo. 
you  will  como  in. 
It  will  beconiG. 
you  will  pity  mo. 
she  will  soek. 
ho  will  marry, 
she  will  uso  it  up. 

LESSON  XXIX. 

if  it  will  or  shall  not. 
it  will  die. 
I  will  shoot, 
you  will  fjhoot. 
I  will  kill. 
I  will  kill  you. 
1  will  shoot  you. 
it  will  lead  on. 
you  will  live, 
she  will  recover, 
she  v;ill  come, 
you  two  will  speak. 
I  shall  SBQ  him. 
she  will  die. 
she  will  say. 
it  will  be  galled, 
it  will  finbh,  eat  up. 


,^«;A.^tf.2iiiiJj4w^'ri^.^.   •«!■. 


9^ 


■    '  "i-JW ■  ■'" .  *-'  Wy^:  .■•T^w> 


S4 


y 


4  ye'dyieh, 
4  s;vcVgyet, 
a  dyiut'gaih, 
a  sgi'e^, 
a  yan'dah, 
ahsa'ok, 
a  a'ant, 
a'ont  hull, 
a  knus'gull, 
a  go'clali, 
h  gas'daatl, 
ah  ska'dgil, 
ah  sha'doK, 
ah.  cha'doli, 
a  gVyoh, 
4h  sa'wak, 


a  go'nont, 
&h  sah'dyok, 
|h  syah'dent, 
ah  sek'sek, 
&h  so'hek, 
cha  da' wis, 
chi  wa'eh» 
chi  swa'yah, 
chi  gos'gwall, 
chi  goh'lieli, 
chi  ga'doh, 
chit  kna'gok, 
chah.  da'deh, 
chigogah', 
chi  khe'noli, 

chi  swa'yoh, 


LESSON  XXX.    . 

•  she  will  dio  again. 

.  sho  will  he  ^yi^S-  '    "• 

it  will  wake  or  rouse  me  again. 
a  noiwo  will  be  made, 
I  shall  d:o  again, 
he  will  pity  or  favour  you, 
you  will  iiear. 
he  will  pass  or  goby, 
ho  will  pour. 
IwilUteal. 
I  will  pity  you. 
I  will  cry. 
I  sh.'ill  got  well. 
.    he  will  get  well, 
thou  wilt  get  well. 
I  will  give  to  you. 
thou  wilt  keep,. carry,  or  observe  it. 

LESSON  XXXI. 

I  will  give  you  to  eat 
thou  wilt  be  afraid, 
thou  wilt  fall, 
thou  wilt  continue  to  eat. 
thou  v/ilt  live. 

thou  art  or  has!  been  benevolent, 
at  fii'st,  in  the  first  place, 
when  you  had  it. 
when  I  was  there, 
since  I  began  to  live. 
Lsaid  so  at  t!ie  first, 
when  I  lived  tliere. 
thee,  thou, 
when  I  saw. 

when  GJio  was  or  began  to  be  my  step- 
daughter, 
when  you  came  in. 


11 


-/" 


'"%*.. 


LESSON  XXXII. 

agyah'dD  w4^' oh,  I  have  received  it. 
agyah'do  wah'sygh,  I  have  received  them, 
adah'swa  et'gah  shah,  ill  fortune,  bad  luck. 
a  dah  swi  yuh'shah,  good  fort ane,  prosperity, 
aanan  d-i'do  hot,  they  ought  to  sive  themselves, 
a  weh'oon  dyieh,    no  matter  al)  u';  it. 
a  gwa'waji'yah  shoh,  our  families,  clans,  «Sic 
aga'doh  oh,  I  have  become, 
a'ga  d\  nah'gs  ui,  I  ought  to  try,  endeavour. 
a'gvvvs  nyies,    I  would  speak  to  you.  (plu.) 
a'sha  guh'ni  go'a  y^n'dah  da'  ni  ak,   he  ought  to  be  in  the  ha- 
bit of  explaining  to  them. 
a  ge'hahshah,  my  hired  man,  or  woTi\n  ;    my  servant  or 

person  employed  to  do  any  particular  thing, 
ak  nonk'da  nih,  I  am  sick,  I  am  in  pain, 
ao  hwafi'sho,  of  itself,  spontaneously. 
a  ga'd  ih  d^a,   I  am  wasting  it,  sqaandering,  &c. 
a'gadi'yuh,  I,should  fight 
a  gi'yah  dah  geh,   on  our  (two)  bodies, 
atga'nyes  hah,   plaything. 

ai  swagah'ha  dgh,    thou  shouldst  turn  it  or  investigate  it  tho- 
roughly, 
a'sek  do  nyooh,  thou  cughtest  to  try  them  or  it  in  all  point3. 
a'yu  d  s'do  onk,  it  ought  to  be  in  use  or  render  service. 
ai  dy  oh  nek,   we  ought  to  remove  it. 
aa'ni  noh,    he  ought  to  buy  it. 

ai'sa  yan  dak,  thou  oughtost  to  have  it  or  keep  it  In  possecslon. 
a'ya  gus'haek,  she  ought  to  take  care. 
a'o  yafi'dano  ok,  it  ought  to  eit3em  liim,  honour  or  value, 
a'ga  ye  is,    it  ought  to  t  ike  place  accordingly. 
a  s.'s'yo  nih,   thou  oughtest  to  make  it. 
a'ya  ye  na,  he  ought  to  seize  or  take  you. 
a'wa  dodyaak,     it  ought  to  grow,  increase. 
ai'dwa  di'uh  dat,  we  ought  to  work,  labour. 
a  gi'  wa  d  ih'da,    I  have  dolivered  the  mess-^ge,  made  report 
a'yuh  da  ^uh,  jt  could  not  do  it,  it  ou^ht  to  fail,  fall  siurt,  or 
be  discouraged  in  regard  to  doing  it. 


'*-^^, 


e»«- 


■■•.it^ljK.      : 


;..«*«-' 


Ill 

it 

111 


56 
LESSON  XXXJII. 

*wo'g4§,  mouth  of  a  cre«k.  ^ 

a'gwa  da  deh'ga»  our  brother§. 

AgM^awanah,  our  vrord,  speech,  discourse.      , 

agwa'nosdas,  we  are  unwilling  to  part  with. 

a  gwali'nek  hah,   we  beg,  are  in  the  habit  of  begging. 

a  gwai'wi  nyont'hah,  we  enter  a  complaint,  protest. 

a'yu  g'i'ak,  much  less  or  mucu  more,  it  might  be  rather,  (it 
is  used  in  comparisons  to  represent  the  increxseof  qual- 
ity compared,  as,  *'much  less  so,  much  more  so,"  &cO 

a  gi'waygji,  I  have. business  in  chargo,  (^spoken  generally  of 
such  as  bring  messages. 

aga  deyah'hih  da  noli,  I  have  been  the  cause  of  difficulties 
in  the  way,  either  in  the  road  or  any  business. 

aon'da  o  dahhah'oh, .  he  should  have  seat  a  runner  or  mes- 
senger. 

anisai'yahda  was?    what  is  the  matter. 

a'dye  na  wah'seeh,   help,  aid,  assistance. 

ado'wadQh,    hunting. 

agek'wandah'oh,   I  have  finished  eating. 

a  gah'dali  oh,  I  have  eaten  enough,  am  full. 

agi'wani'yridoh,  I  have  sanctioned,  approved,  ratified. 

a'ya  gwai'wa  yan  deh,  we  ought  to  kn  jw,  make  ourselves  ac- 
quainted with  the  subject. 

a'ya  go  do'gas,  she  ought  to  liear  of  it,  have  it  made  known 
to  her. 

aga'da  deyii  nan'dahoh,  I  have  finished  my  business,  or  I 
have  prepared  myself,  I  am  prepared. 

aga'nohdo'nyoh  gwa  ni,.  it  has  led  ms  to  consider,  reflact, 
feel  solemn,  anxious.  ^    . 

ade'yanini,    gDod  behavior,  man  igamcnt,  calculation.. 

a  de'yd  os  dooTi,    prudent,  sly,  carefulness. 

jio'dya  yo,    cramped,  drawn,  rtrainod. 

a'glli'dyoa  dak,  I  might  stay,  remain,  or  sit  or  be  in  the 
place.  .(,,.,, 

a  gi'wa  gou'dah  ggh,    I  have  submittod,  given  up  the  matter. 

aa'gat,  gat'huh,    that  I  might  sec,  look,  realize,  receive. 

ak  ni  gcj'^i  et'gent  baJi,  .it  is  the  thing  that  grieves  me. 


"  nn-«HTiff-*!f  "WWi* 


27 

LESSON  XXXIV. 

a'n^h  e'w|  noh  d4h  ?    what  language,  speech,  or  tonguft  is  it 
a'yonl'yu  o  wih,    she  ought  to  tell.  '  '  • 

a'a  ni' noh  dg'nyQ  ok,    they  ought  to  think,  consider,  reflect. 
a  wl'^h  shQh'Qh,  flowers,  blossoms. 

a  gwat  ha  i'neh,   we  are  trtavelling,  or  on  our  journey.  ' 

a'wa  do  nih,  it  may  produce,  it  may  yield  frnit.  ' 

a  gygh'he  nyoh,    our  lives,  our  being,  or  existence, 
a'syah  da'ak,    thou  oughtest  to  be  present. 
a  gwa'yah  da  deh,   us,  to  us,  for  us,  on  our  part, 
a'gvva'  yah.  dah'shoh,  our  bodies,     (spoken  to  another.) 
a'yo  gwa'deh  sah'g  ok,    we  may,  might,  could  &c.,  be  ready, 
a'gat  gat'huh,  let  me  see,  (with  some  anxiety  or  concern.) 
a'gjno'gh  gwak,    1  ought  to  love  thee, 
a  gWtt'noh  saah,  I  have  read,  or  am  reading, 
ak'ni  gg'i  yus  dah'gwa  noh,  my  comforts,  joys,  happinessL 
a  gah'  dyoh  gwa'no  nih,    my  fears,  the  cause  of  my  fears.    • 
a  gah' dyoh  gwa  nih,  my  fear,  the  cause  of  my  fear.  - 

a  gah'dygh  gwa'nis  thali,    that  which  terrifies  me. 
a'seh  sa  no  nih,  thou  mayest  or  shouldst  take  care  of  or  keep  it 
a'ya  gwah'has  dch'go  ok,   we  may  or  should  be  made  strong, 
or  nerved  up  to  effjrt  by  it,  (speaking  of  ourselves  to 
another. ) 
a'yo  gwah'has  deh'syo  nyat,    we  may  or  should  be  strength- 
ened by  it,  as,    e.  g.,  by  food  or  rest 

a' oh  e  sat,    it  is  joyful,  or  it  is  cause  for  rejoicing. 

a'g^va  no'gh  gwah,   we  love  it,  (spoken  of  ourselves  to  ano- 
ther.) 

a  w^'nis  ha'do  gah'dili,  holy  day,  Sabbath. 

a  gg'gweh  dah'shgh,   my  people. 

ado^h'swiyushall,  good  fortune,  success,  prosperity. 

a'gyana'ek,   I  may  or  must  forward,  aid,  abet,  further  th« 
cause. 

as'hanonyrs'hah,  property,  possessions,  riches. 

a'ge  ga  nyak'toh,  that  with  which  I  have  paid  a  debt 

a'yudah'godak,  it  may  or  sliould  shine,  or  be  brilliant 

a'gdi'yahda'ah  heh'ock,  the/  might  or  should  have  retire;^ 
or  gone  to  rest,  or  kept  sti'  in  sonfie  place. 


m 


III 


w 

V  '■' 


s*. 


nam 


a* 


li 


A 


■k"^ 


:^' 


.i-i 


•i8 


WESSON  XXXV. 


a'u  nih'dyon  dak,  they  may  or  should  stay  remain,  sit,  be  there. 

o'o  na'wa  ge'ak,   it  may  or  i;hould  become  theirs. 

a'o  nont'gan  yak'd  jh,   tliat  which  they  are  paid. 

a'yak  hi'on  yah,  that  wc  iiiighl  teach  them,  or  they  teach  U3. 

u'sye  na  wahs,  thou  oiiglitc.  1 1 )  assist. 

n'vo  n"s'l.et,  h  m:iv  or  oiij>i;l  t  <  be  a  lonof  time. 

a'yuhjih'gek,  it  mightorsho-ila  be  cl  nidy. 

a'o  nl'nnh  do'nyoh  gwaii,  il  mighl  or  should  lead  them  to  con- 
sider, think,  loci  s:>loini\ 

a'di'a  wak,    they  i)i:iy  or  might  keep,  c^rry,    observe,   take 
charge  of  or  posse?s. 

aos'gahah,    ot'  itfceli'.  by  itself,  alone  clear  from  mixture. 

a  gai'wagwaih'sohsok,  it  rur^y  or  should  bear  testimony,  cer- 
tify, or  ex;  Ilia 

cgl'nah  g.li'd  Ji,    I  am  v;aiting  f  r  it. 

a  g./na  g^.  d  jIi,   I  was  born ,  1  hi!V3  commerxed  a  settlement. 

a  on'da  go'wa  n gii'dj  c  s,   it  will  bo  controlled;  ruled. 

a  g^n'yah  sali,  my  heart. 

a  gen  yah'saTi,  uiy  t'u*  >>  t,  my  neck. 

ayo'gwatga'n.  ok,  v,c m.-y  or  should  watch,  regard  attentive-" 
iy,  (spoken  ofourKolvestoanct'.ier.) 

a  gyah'da  ge'e  y  (.  h,    I  cm  weak,  I  have  became  feeble. 

a  gach'hah  doh,  1  am  worn  out,  exhaustad. 

awcn'yahsah,    heart. 

a  ni  sa'ye  na  wah  gji  ?  wliat  hatt  thcu  dane. 

agat'lion  das,    lamoledicnf. 

a'gathondat,  I  may  or  should  hear,  listen,  obey,  adhere  to. 

a  gat  hon  da  sek,    Ilnay  or  si;ould  l:e  in  the  habit  of  hearing  or 
obevins;. 

a  ga  de'yl  nok'dall,  I  may  or  should  finish. 

a'nayawa?  what  shall  be  done,  how  shall  it  be. 

adih  gwa'nahot,  whatever. 

agas'hlli  o'ondyTell,  I  ain  remembering. 

awe'eyyh,   itisde.d. 

a  ge'yah  his,  1  am  habitually  makmg  mistakes. 

age'^ahonji,  1  am  skilful. 

a  gwg'nosha  yh^  I  araslow  of  speech. 


n 


k 


j.tiili-.iiii'"rtii.ni'ili   I'  "  "iiiWii 


nmiUWfeitji 


KWM** 


"•i 


'«v, 


"19 


LESSON   XXXVL 

ai'dwas  cle  is,  we  should  keep,  take  care  of,  attend  to. 

a'cnori'ddli  svvi'yusdaii,     that  they  might  prosper,  or  hara 
g03d  luck. 

a'o  non'dlli  swa'et  g^int.    tliat  tliey  might  be  unfortunate,  have 
bad  luck. 

a'o  dihnigo'a  ni'uasuo'ok,  that  they  might  be  humble,  lowly, 
poorin^^pirit. 

a  da'ni  dd'os  liah,  mercy,  pity,  compassion,  kindness. 

ak  lii  no'oh  gwali,  wo  love  her  or  them,  or  they  love  us. 

a  gi  lio'ch  gsvah,    we  two  !ovo  it,,  or  it  loves  us. 

ae'swa  do'  hi,  you  may  or  might  dony. 

a'Q  sa  yo  na  gad,    slie  or  tliey  should  be  born  again,  or  malce  a 
new  settlement. 

a'ya  na'ga  guh,  she  may  remove  or  emigrate. 

a'Qsa'unandoh,  they  should  become  well  again. 

a  gat'wais  huh,  or,  a  gat  wa  Ts'hah,   my  spirit  or  soul. 

a'gya  nan  dah'oh,  I  have  finished. 

a'ga  da  d^'gwah  se,  1  have  picked  out,  chosen  for  myself. 

a'y  o  gwa  dohs',  we  might  bo  or  become,  or  it  might  befal  us. 

a'wa  £;adohs,  I  misrht  be  or  become,  or  it  midit  befuil  me. 

a'di  nayr.n'dAk  sliah,  jij-jyer,  jietition,  supplication. 

a'd^  na  y^in'dah  gv.-ah'shlh,  (same  as  the  last. ) 

a  gwa'yah  dage'e  yo,  we  arc  getting  feeble,  weak,  tired. 

a  gwa'yah  daii'seh,  we  arc  depending  upon,  or  relyingupon  it 

a'a  dali'svvi  yus'dah,  he  may  or  might  make  it  to  prosper. 

a  gwa  wa'ji  y.'»h,  oin*  fimily,  or  our  blood  descendents. 

agali'se  ah'grih,  in  my  clan. 

ak  ni'a  wi'no  on  (iyieh,  v,  e  two  have  brought  them  with  us. 

at  ga'no  n^s'  liT. h,  riches. 

a  v/a  da'wih  sek,  it  miglit  be  in  the  habit  of  giving. 

a'she  yo'want  lias,    thou  miglitest  shew  her  or  them. 

a'ya  gwa'noh  do'nygh  gwak,  we  may  or  might  reflect  or  con- 
sider uy)on  it. 

ae'sat  hon  dek,  that  thou  mig'itost  hear  or  obej'. 

ak  hi'ya  do'es  ygh'gwali  seh,     we  are  praying,  pleading,  or 

supplicating  for  lior  or  them. 
ak  hi'ya  d(>'es  y  fh'gv/ahi  seeh,  we  were  praying,  pleading,  <Smj. 


!l 


fff"riiy: 


^c~ 


j 


fl  \ 


90 
LESSON  XXXVIL 

a' 0  di'wa'o  gah'do  ok,  they  may  bocome  renowned,  distin- 
guished 

a  gwa'do  es'yoh  gwah,  VvO  have  been  begging,  praying,  or  are 
in  the  habil  if  doinrj  f;o 

a'u  no  hek,  they  m  .y  or  mii^ht  live  or  bo  saved. 

a'Qnr.n'yahsi'yLiak,  that  their  hearts  may  or  might  become 
good)  pure.  » 

a'yo  gvve'nyo  ok,   it  miy  be,  or  becDme  practicable,  possible. 

a'a  di  dak,    they  might  htand. 

aodi'yah  dowTnt,  it  might  come  to  them,  they  might  re- 
ceive it. 

a'o  di'wa  gwen  ni  yus'thak,  itmnyor  might  bvjlicve  them. 

n  o  di'non  dl'dyieh,  it  may  or  m'glit  tollow  them. 

adi'nondadyieh,  they  miy  or iniglt  tollow  it. 

a'she  yvs'de  is'do  ok,  that  thou  mayest  keep  or  take  care  of 
her  or  them. 

a'  di  u  guh ,   they  may  choose,  select,  liave  their  choice. 

a  di'uk  ho  shah,  provisions  got  at  tii3  feast  for  the  dead. 

a  wa  doh  syoh,  the  things  may  be,  or  might  be  or  become. 

a'yak  hi'gon  dab' go  on  dyich,  we  might  lead  them  or  train 
them  uj)  in  tiiat  way. 

agwa'yahdaahs,  we  are  dependent  upon,  or  rely  upon  it. 

a'ni  oye  ah'  1  what  has  he  done  1 

a  ai'wa  gwen  ni'yus,  that  he  might  believe. 

a  gek'saft  dah,  my  child. 

a  gek'sah  da  yah,  I  have  children. 

a  gi'wa  o  gah,  I  have  heard. 

agi'wano'oh  gwah,  that  1  might  love  the  matter. 

a  gi'was  de  is,  that  I  might  regard  or  observe  the  matter. 

a'gek  do  nyOQh,  that  1  might  taste  or  tonch  them. 

ae  swa  dg  hi,  you  may  or  might  deny. 

ft  ga'nQ  het,  it  will  fill  up  or  cause  to  be  filled. 

h  wa'ni  hah,  it  will  cease,  stop,  leave  off. 

4ja'gw^hdyon  dak,  we  shall  or  will  stay,  or  be  or  sit  there 
again. 

^ja'gwanagek,  we  will  dwell,  inhabit,  or  live  there,  again. 

I  ?l  goftduk,  be  will  yield,  or  surrender  up  something. 


hs^ 


V- 


-—*"■- fi^i-'^'^-'^'fciii^^i^'- 


■1«N 


*■■-•*•»!  Wm*nw«  *«w.juIBIhpuiiuJ  -)t*  ^'■'tri^im 


81 

LESSON   XXXVUL 

h  o'gon  dirk,  he  will  yield  him  up  to  another. 

4  o'gon  dak,  he  will  have  his  noao  g.illcd. 

ftgah'sihdok,    my  foot  will  bo  or  is  blistered  or  gallei 

a  wv'geh  nyok,  my  hand  will  bo  blistered  or  galled. 

a  ot'hon  dek,    he  will  hear  or  listoa. 

ayu'ah  het,  it  will  bs  settled,  onfirm^d,  dscided. 


4yQgw-ayaI 

U3,  (spoken  tDaaother.) 
4  yQgwagi'agwat,    it  will  load  U3  astray,  turn  us  from  the 

path. 
4  gVoyagili,  it  will  sufTir  pain,  torture,  hardship. 
4  yiuh  dy  jh  sek,  it  will  fo  vr  or  b.^  afraid. 
4  wirn'dok  d ah,   it  will  corno  to  a;i  cad,  fhiish  gy  outs 
4n  ja'gwa  do'is ha,  we  will  rest  r.gaia. 
4  ye'chi  yais'd  ih,  you  will  forbid  them,  rebuke  them. 
4odi  yah'do  wlnt,  itwilloms  to  them,  they  will  reaeive  it. 
4  ga'nah  son'dah  go'ok,  it  will  bocomo  a  thing  0:1  which  to  bang 

or  suspend. 
4sgvs'aah,  it  will  finish,  eat  up,  c^.nsmr>3  again. 
4 swage  jlnt,  it  will  he  J  or  euro  m^. 
4  ya  gwa  di  ali'd'ih'gw'ik',  on  o.n*  ace  jtint,  making  use  of  us. 
4n  ja'gwit  giTi,    we  shall  or  will  reioase,  let  go  again, 
a  yon  dj'ishah,  she  will  rest  or  h.ivs  an  intermission. 
4 yondi  nilige v.t,  she  will  try, cado  ivour,  measure,  compare. 
4  ga'ni  yon  dak,  it  will  hang,  or  bo  hung  up,  weighed. 
4yQgwa  djh'nocn'dyiehselc,      we  will  continue  to    keep 

awav,  avoid. 
4sgwai'yah.  da  gad  it,  thou  wilt  drive  us  away. 
4  gwayah  da  ga  dat,    we  will  remove  you. 
4swa'dokdih,  it  will  end  agar.;. 
4yQ'gwasdo'ok,  we  wdl  use  again. 
4y<?gwasde'isdo*Qk,  we  willkeop,  observe,  take  careof. 
4  gat  g  .t  huh»  1  will  Iwk  at.  . >  -^ 

4  ya  go  do'nyat,  it  will  drive  her  towards. 


. 


W.' 


.■A^^.X^tf^..- 


»2 


111  i 

i] 


LESSON  XXXIX. 

h  O'ge  gon  dvk,  he  will  drive  me. 

h  ya  go  da'dat  gat'huh,    she  will  I  jok  at,  or  sec  herself. 

4  yafi'^ihvi  nih,    he  will  coriquftr,  pravailover  thee. 

a  yuh'sa  wak,  it  shall  or  will  cjmmencD. 

4  dyu'noh  do  ni  ak,  she  will  control,  rule,  decide. 

4  yg'ffwat  ga'a.  gk,    we  must  or  will  notice,  watch,  look  to. 

4  ya' ga  da  datgah' wit  ak,     she  will  have  yielded,  submitted 

herself. 
4gai'waye  ih,  it  will  befuliirie!!,  Dccomplished. 
ayogwadi  ua'yan  dak,  we  shall  bj  praying, 
asho'swalini'gohhori'dlh,    he  will  cbe^t,  deceive  us. 
Q  swa  noh  do'nyo  ok,    you  will  consider,  reflect,  meditate  upon. 
h  a  wen  iioh'do  nyj'ok,    sho or  thoy  v.ill  think  of  him. 
a  swah'wundat,  you  will  .iio. 
4  eh'sis  ha.  on  dak,  thou  f-,aouhlr>t  b'nJ  him. 
4  swas'he  di'ak,  yovi  will  count,  or  v/ill  have  counted. 
4  ganah  na  waii,    it  will  melt,  get  warm, 
a  as'ln'i  on  dat,  he  will  bo  ent.uis^led,  ensnareJ. 
•4nt  ho'wa  ni'nok,  they  will  sand,  or  call  for  them. 
faS  ha'oh  das,    he  will  s  )rten,  make  tender. 
a  a'ali  daati,  he  will  burn  it  up,  consume. 
4ya'goga'is  dah,    she  will  improve,  make  progress,  it  will 

ubmit  to  her. 
4ya'goyahdagehali,     she  will  derive   benefit,  advantage, 

help,  from  it. 
4h  sa'di  no  dali,  thou  mayest,  shalt  or  wilt  sing, 
dwv'gyatidayundet'het,     I  will   make   myself    manifest, 

1  will  be  known,  distinguished. 
4  gat'hon  dat,  I  will  hear,  obey. 

ftgat'hon  dasek,  I  will  be  in  the  h:\bitof  obeying,  hearing. 
4ch  hweli'no  nih,  thou  wilt  roll  it  up,  bind  it  up  again. 
4yaondah'dano'gk,   there  will  be  a  sh  iking,  or  trembling. 
4  wirn'dah  so  gub,    it  will  fade,  lose  its  colour. 
4  ga'da  gi  eh,  it  will  wither,  die. 
4  ya'go  dyah'ggh.,  she  will  share,  participate. 
4  a'noh  so  nih,  he  will  make  a  house,  or  building, 
q  a  noa  do  d4!l,  he  will  erect  a  tramo* 


n 


•*»»!--•■: 


'-^. 


LESSON  XL.' 

4  ya'ok',  it  will  bo  gallod,  diafbd,  blistered. 

6  yu'y4n  det  het,  it  will  bo  made  plain,  clear,  manifest 

4  yo'gwa  a'gwat,  it  will  turn  us  aside,  lead  us  astray. 

4'4  nos  de  Is,  they  will  attend  to,  take  care  of,  follow,  take  up. 

4  ga'yoh,  it  will  come,  arrive. 

4swadQh,  it  will  heal  again,  or  become  again.     You  will  bo 

or  become,  or  give  a  present. 
4  JQ'hek,  it  will  live  again,  or  you  will  live. 
4jai'yeh,  she  will  die  again. 
4  yaiyeli,  slie  will  die. 
4  ye'dy  leh,  she  will  bo  flying, 
a  swu'at,  you  will  pass  by. 
4  sgi'eli,  I  shall  or  will  die  again. 
4  sgyeh',   I  will  awake  again,  arouse  again, 
a'swa'gyet',  it  will  make  me  awake  again,  arouse  me  again, 
adyiutgaih,  anoiscorlcui  noise,  will  be  made  at  a  distance, 
a'e  gah,  I  will  see  him. 

a  gaat  gati,  I  will  let  go,  give  up,  leave,  relinquish. 
4  ga'doh  ho'ah,  I  will  rejoice,  be  glad,  be  thankful. 
4  yo'hek,  she  will  live. 

4  ye'gah,  she  will  see,  she  will  see  it,  be  convinced. 
4  yeh'sha  iiih,  she  will  conquer,  prevail  over,  out-do. 
4  want'his,    it  will  remove,  or  be  removed,  go  aside,  shovo 

along. 
4  wan'd  s,  it  will  profit,  bo  of  advantage,  be  useful, 
ach  he  yoh,  thou  wilt  give  or  hand  it  to  her,  give  her  again. 
4  eh'sis  hu  on  d-iJi,  thou  wilt  tic,  bind,  fasten  him. 
4n'de'ek  haah,  or,  an'deli  khaah',  pertaining  to  the  day-timo. 
4'yu  haht,  it  will  dawn,  become  day  ;  to-morrow. 
4  sgaat'gah,  thou  v.'ilt  give  me  up,  let  meg-). 
4gs'nylet,  or,  ag'snyut,  1  will  speak, 
ag.s'gatgwih,  1  will  laugh. 

4  gvs'ho  guh,  1  will  bite,  take  a  mouthful  oi  any  thing. 
4  girs'yo  nib,  it  will  be  fixed,  made. 
4  gwl'noh  sa  wah,  I  will  read,  repeat,  recite. 
4  o'w4  OQh'sa  whht  I  will  repeat  his  words. 
4'ont  huh,  he  will  pour. 


'■'■m. 


i-- 


i>i4 


.t-< 


afckSUMntaarikwtkB^IUu! 


I 


84 

LEcSSON    XU. 

4  ga'da  w^'unt,  I  will  go  over,  get  ovor. 

4  gi'di  w.i  Qh,    I  am  going  a  swlniming. 

ftyga'da  vvi  ant,  I  will  go  over,  got  ovor,  6jc.,  again. 

&dyu'deh  ho'd^^  qs,  it  will  b^  sliut  out;  cxclaJod,  debarred  ;— 

(spoken  of  thing:;  at  a  diHtanco. ) 
4  sga'isdQ'gk,  it  will  bo  sota^iJe,  put  by  or  removed,  again,  or, 

back  again. 

4  gai'wa  y:.n  d  ili'go  qk,  it  will  be  or  bocome  duty,  it  will  be  a 

matter  to  be  attended  to. 
6'ye  ye  na'wah  khQok,  she  will  or  should  hold  it. 
ftsiia'yent  hwagiih,    ho  .sliall  ro.ip  agiin,  rcceivo  or  gather 

again  ti^e  increase. 

5  ga'do  gaht,  I  will  iniko  a  fii-c,  Icindlc. 

h  ga'jl  o  gull,  the  firo  will  kindle,  get  well  a  burning. 

^  geh'so  jo'dah,  I  will  lay  in  a  heap,  ho.ip  up,  pile. 

a^n'dali,  hunger,  famine,  sc  irceness  of  tood. 

a'odi  yah'da  ga'ih,  it  will  bito,  dcvuur,  consume  them. 

i  gi'wah  dght,  I  will  destroy,  blot  out,  annihilate. 

4'gye  naah',  I  will  take  hold  of,  c:itch,  receive. 

4ga'ye  naah',  it  will  take  hold  of,  catch,  receive. 

&'yo»dadyah'dadah,    she  will  be  burnoJ,  also,  she  will  bo 

set  up. 
4  gyaTi'do  dah,  I  will  burn  it,  set  it  up. 
&gyyadyah'djQa;i,    1  will  nu;-so  yju,  lake  care  of  you  in 

sicknef-.; 
4  yon'dy.ih  :gih'hat  hull,  s'>e  will  turn  ovor. 
?i  ga'dyah  tgxh'hat  liul^,  I  will  turn  over, 
ftsnigg'aik,  thou  wilt  take  care,  be  cautious,  bo  "on  the  look 

out. 
4  a'wvk  wa'e  has,  she  will  set  a  table  for  him. 
aa'y^^nt  huh,  he  will  plant;  sow,  loan  on  interest,  or  invest  ia 

stocks. 
4  goh'h  ih  shi  Q  guh,  I  will  hire  a  servant, 
ao'noshrvhgvva'nisthaak;  it  will  remind  them,  cause  them  to 

re.nember. 
4  dwen'nQh  do'nyoh  gwaak,  we  v/iil  consider,  reflect,  or  be  in 

the  habit  of  c :)nsidoririg,  rt fluting. 


4nt 


or, 

)c  a 

ther 


n  bo 


)U  in 


look 


est  m 


;m  to 


be  in 


35 


LESSON  XLII. 


^  yon'dyirs  hiih,  sho  will  lio  down,  r(^tIrotorMt. 

4  g-it'gah  sou  (I'l  gull,    I  will   loavo,  stray  tVoiii,  forsake  the 

company  I  was  willi. 
4  gadei  aah,  I  will  get  ready,  bo  ready. 
4'y  wayati'dili  saak  bol(,  s!)C  or  tlioy  will  sec\',  look,  search, 

or  b3  soekin".  1  ojkinsf,  soarchinff  tor  him. 
Q  o  yah  duh'd  jht,  it  will  lead  him  aslr.iy. 
Ujagoyah'd  I  gwat,  it  will  save  her  or  them  again,  (spoken 

of  either  the  life  or  the  soul.)  preserve,  hcil  again. 
Q  j-^  g'l  Q  hes  dak,  it  will  make  her  or  them  to  live  again,  prove 

salvation  to  her  or  tliem. 
n  ga'des  aah,  I  will  get  I'o  idy  for  it. 
a  ga'y4  nTai'daht,  it  will  finish,  be  finished,  got  done,  bo  pre- 

])arcd 
4'yu!i'g"i  yr«.n  dak,  it  will  have,  or  there  will  ho  tlicre,  powder, 

nshcs,  diibt. 
4'on  du?ik,  he  will  stand,  rise  up,  stop. 
4'an  diyah'dadonyok,    thoy   will   be,   have  existence,  there 

will  bo  persons. 
n  g  I'ja  g>^oh,  it  will  exert  itself,  take  an  active  part 
a  ye'J-t,  she  will  pnss. 
4'nirnt  yu  o  will,  thev  will  tell. 

a  go'yafi  dah'srv  no  nih,  1  will  keep  thee,  take  care  of  thee,  pre- 
serve tlico. 
a  go'y us  do'  's,   I  will  attend  upon,  take  care  of,  provide  for  thee, 
a  gon  da  ah'sck,  I  will  be  very  kind  tj  thee,    (spoken  of  the 

habitail  conduct. ) 
Ont  liaat  h  s,  he  will  draw  near,  (i.  c.  to  the  speaker,  and  thoso 

with  him.) 
fthsa'yk,  thou  wilt  hear. 
4I1  sad  ion  dooli,  thou  wilt a.<k,  inquire, 
a  gi'dcs  haht,  I  will  resist,  struggle,  defend  myself, 
^ntga'd  ids'irt,  1  will  exe:t  myself  t.)  the  utmost;  use  myself 

up  ;  (spoken  of  somotliing  to  be  dono  at  a  distance  ) 
&hsi'eh,  thou  wilt  do. 

hh  saat'gah,  thou  wilt  leave,  forsake,  surrender,  give  up,  submit. 
4  gi'isdo'yk,  it  will  bo  laid  aside,  put  by,  removed. 
^ ancK  wah'dln  dyatj  he  will  urge  t!ie  matter  forward. 


I 


'  t-^MHl 


m^ 


LESSON  XLIII. 

4'yjiB'di(ih,  he  will  pity  thoo,  do  ihoo  luvor  or  JcinJnosi. 

C^  sgi'dli4h»  tl>ou  wilt  jjity  mo. 

&  ya'io  o'syQli'gw^h,  he  will  pray  to,  besoooh  tlieo, 

ft'ayois,  ho  will  do  it,  ho  will  bo  strict  or  exact  in  doinj  so. 

Sot'honde'c,  ho  will  iiear,  hear  habitually. 

k  a'ont,  he  will  pass  or  go  ljy. 

4'yy  gwa'd}  n;j'yqn  dahU,  wo .sliall  bo  praying. 

ai'swa  do'hi,  you  mny,  might  or  should  den}'. 

4  ya'gwat  gaat'lmh,  wo  shall  sco  or  bohoUl,  soo  to  bo  so,  roallzd. 

tt'odi  nah'kwah',  tlioy  will  bo  angry  or  mad. 

4  y&'na  ga  guh,  or,  a  yo'mi  g.l  guh,    she  will  remove  or  omi- 
grato. 

4  yuli'ni  go'i  yu  aak,  it  will  bo  happy. 

h  ya'gut  hon  dok,  she  will  hoar  it. 

4  yu'yaadaluhrli,  it  will  obtain,  got,  ;j  an,  recclvo,  by  moaiia 
of,  or  on  accouiit  of  it. 

4  Q  wa  yah'dih  saak,  she  will  lof»k,  loni;  tor,  or  seek  him. 

4  yaih'saak,  she  will  seek,  long  for,  sc;ii-ch  for. 

4  yu'doh  no'on  dyioli'sok,  it  will  kooj)  away  from,  stand  aloof, 
(spoken  of  the  general  habit  or  |)ractico. ) 

lyu'ahdo'gk,  it  will  have  past  or  gone  by,   (i.  e.,  the  placo 
where  the  speaker  is. ) 

4dyu'ahdo'Qk,  it  will  have  come  past,  (i.e.,  some  point  be- 
tween it  and  the  speaker.) 

4gi'wTsaah,    I  will  agree  or  promiso,  covenant,  give  com- 
mandment. 

4  kno'gh  gwaak,  I  will  lovo. 

4  kno'oh  gwaak,  I  will  eat  bjiled  corn. 

4  kngh'gwaak,  I  will  di  ink  milk. 

4  yo'nishet,  it  will  bo  a  long  timp. 

4yQnt'ga  nVaah,  she  will  moot,  altond;bo  present  at  a  meeting. 

4^noiQt  gat'huli,  tliey  will  see,  lock,  behold. 

4'q  sa  yah'dih  saak,  they  will  seek,  search,  long  for  thoe. 
4  yo'gWA  dgohs',  wc  will  take  iastoad  of,  or  in  exchange  J    al- 
so, our  wishes  are  answered,  wo  are  satisfied,  &;c. 
tt'O  want  hon  dek,  she  or  thsy  will  obey  him,  hoar  him. 
4' 4  ftont  g%h,  they  will  fi'ilt.' leave,  fjr^ako,  rojoct 


i't*uj.l;iiHiii''iir=* 


LESSON  XLIV. 

4  a'yJi^  il»^'ik>  l»^i  will  ho  thoro. 

4  a'yah  da'aU,  he  will  bo  lying  (ipon. 

4  o'g"^  ya'iL'ih  svvi'}  u>  duh,  ho  will  blosa  or  prosper  thoni* 

4  ga'di  o'nya  ni'aak,  I  will  icnoh,  be  a  tauchcr. 

fta'iiQh  iicht,  ho  will  nil  up. 

ft.VnQhoht,  they  will  s'lvo,  tiny  will  nnketollvo. 

&'o  ni  wus'theht,  it  will  be  or  boo uno  theirs,  they  will  bccoma 

the  ov/ners,  pi'Oprioturs  tliLTOof. 
6  dwat'gondak,  wo  will  go  tlicro. 
i  a'o  ni  uak,  ho  will  »n  iko,  cronto,  fi.v,  regalato. 
4  a'o' 111  ak,  ho  will  mnko  a  road. 
a  a'nyaak,  ho  will  marry. 
4'o  noil  dyaali'dahg )  ok,  thoy  nvxy  or  might  b^  or  hav3  beon 

usi  g  or  occii|)}  itig. 

a'nyh  dan dih,  they  will  go. 

4'an  di  yah'da  yun'dah  g-Vgk,  it  will  bo  their  olTlco,  charge, 
or  duty,  they  will  bo  m  ido  to  have  in  charge,  or  to  be  un- 
der obligations  to  do  so,  thoy  will  be  set  apart  for  the  ser- 
vice. 

4'odi'wao'gah  do'gk,  they  will  bo  or  become  notorious,  re- 
nowned, celebrated 

0  gVak,  it  sliall  bo,  it  will  bo.  In  most  cases  where  it  is  used 
before  another  veri),  it  i.s  a  form  omployerl  tor  making  a 
supposition,  or  oxprossinga  condition,  and  should  be  trans- 
lated, "it  being  so,"  '•  if  it  be  so,*'  &c.  Its  use  with  a  ne- 
gative adcr  it,  is  very  common,  and  there  it  is  equivalent 
to  "if  not,"  "  It  will  not,"  »I*>:C  ,  and  sometimes,  "  it  shall 
not",  "  Ictit  not  bo",  Ov:c.,  correi^ponding  with  its  poten- 
tial form  "a'girk." 

§'ya  gwa  yrs'hc.n  dat,  wo  shall  or  Nvill  fill  down. 

5'ya  gwci  y  vs'hr.  n  dak,  wo  shall  or  will  be  lying  down. 

&ya'g'v:ayah'dyonc^nt,  wo  shall  fall,  (speaking  of  ourselves 
toothers. ) 

O'nrjh  d.:.n  dyat,  lli?y  will  mike  the  business  go  forward. 

^yak  hiyo'dyc  an  dyftih,  we  shall  liave  brought  them  up, 
roiiKxl,  increased,  ccuscd  ihcm  to  grow. 


:^.v.'&>m0'' 


■iM'MU^ 


iJOta 


f^s;:. 


V 


99 
LESSON  XLV. 

|igag\ve'nih,  it  can  bo  done,  it  can  do  it. 

a  ga'dil  no  d^Tiy  I  will  sing. 

a  ge'nyu  dih,  I  will  raise  cip,  make  to  stand. 

4  wyk'ni  go'a  yus'dah  go'gk,    it  will  bo  a  cause  of  happiness  to 

me,  it  will  make  mo  to  roj  jice,  it  will  com  fort  me. 
a  5'go  yii'do  e'syoh  gwahs,  he  will  pray  or  intercede  for  them, 
a  ga'np  ho'ok,  it  will  be  filled,  or  become  full, 
^o'yahd  I'yan  doet  heht,  he  will  m.ikc   himself  manifest,  tD 

bo  seen,  to  be  renowned, 
a  ot'ga  nyak'dah,  that  whicli  will  be  paid,  or  is  to  bn  paid  to  him. 
a  sho'dah  sch'do  ok,  ho  will  hide,  or  will  h.ive    hid   himself 

again, 
u'an  di  yah'dali  doll,  tlioy  will  got  hv^t,  wander,  go  astray. 
a  wir'gah  dyyh'sek,   1  will  Ijc  afraid,  or  it  will  fear  me. 
a  \v\r'gyah  don'diat,  1  will  tremble  or  shake,  1  will  be  shaken. 
4'nandyah'd;_)k,  thoy  will  waste,  m'^mprovO;  abuse  the  privi- 
lege, keep  others  from  the  use  -f  their  rights,  or  use  the 

rights  or  property  of  others  to  th'  •  1  >j.3,  detriment,  or  delay 

of  the  owners 
a'  nan  dyc'sat,  they  will  waste  or  sqn  >■:  lor. 
a  yg'ni  aak,  it  will  be  madcj  formed,  i.irijioned,  or  it  will  make, 

iorm,  fashion. 
h  yok'hi  yoh,  they  will  give  us,  besto'>\  upon  us. 
ayo'gyoho'shah,  wo  shall  or  will  rejoice,  (speaking  among 

ourselves.) 
4  ya'gwi's  de'fs,  we  shall  or  will  attend  to,  or  take  cire  of  it,  or 

keep,  or  I'ollow  it. 
h  go'ya  n  Vah,  I  wd!  tollow  thy  tracks,  ways,  example, 
ft  ya'gyo  he'nyok,  we  shall  live. 
a  jo'gwa  ye'ih,  we  .shall  meet  or  assemble  again. 
ft  sa'yc  na'wah  se'aak,  it  will  support,  help,  i^trcngthon  thee. 
ft  wan'do  nih,  it  will  yield,  produce. 
&  wan'dodyaak,  it  will  increase,  grow  up,  accumulate,  yielti 

inrerest. 

&'yOgwadyi:h'dah'goQk,    we  shall  or  will  use  it,  (spoken 

among  .jurselvevS  ) 
^  yn'no  <jk  tek,  it  will  be  painful. 


~ —        <iwiii  I    r 


99 

LES30N   XLVf. 

Chaga'Q  hodirs,  lie  who  saves  life,  the  Saviour,  ho  who  has 

saved  them,  in  the  habit  of  saving  'ife. 
chi'waye  ih,  thou  art  honest,  i.  e  thou  doost  rightly,  corraclly. 
che  yah'do  uh  thah,  that  by  or  with  which  thou  washest  her  or 

tliem. 
chih  sc'dehjih,  earl^n'nthe  morning,  (past  time.) 
Cheyoh'ho  dirs,  thou  art  their  Saviour,  savest  their  life,  i.e., 

habitually, 
che  non'dia  tliaTi,  the  place  where'  tliou  feedest  them,  manger, 
cho  gwayahdagwah,  he  has  saved  us,  saved  us  from  danger, 

rescued, 
cho  gwa'nok  doh,  ho  has  called  or  sent  for  us  on  account  of  it. 
chg  gwa'no  goh,  he  has  called  or  sent  for  us. 
chi  o'noh  doJi,  he  knew  that  or  it  before,  he  foreknew, 
chgyah'da  gwah,  thou  hast  rescusd  or  sivod  me  again, 
chi'o  dyeahdah  goh,  when  he  used,  or  was  using  it. 
cha' dyduh'dah'gwah,  thou  art  using,  (spoken  of  things  in  use. 
chi  a'g3  ya  do  ni,  when  he  wrote  to  them, 
chi  a'yah  thaah,  when  he  was  hung  up,  (used  also  for  cruci- 
fying ) 
chi  a'yah  daall,  when  he  was  present,  in  the  company, 
cha  gVe  wah'dah  gwah,  the  place   where  he  punishes  her  or 

them, 
che'swa  ye'ah,  you  resemble  him,  are  in  his  likeness, 
chi  gek'sah  a  ah,  when  I  was  a  child. 
chi  ge'gah  jih,  when  f  was  old. 
chi'khe  n  jh,  when  slie  was  my  .step  dauglitcr. 
Chi'nos  haJi'gyh,   Wars. iw,  Wyoming  Co.  N.  Y. 
(Is  wa'd'i  nah'gauh'dah  g-di,    piirable,    fable,   comparison,  or 

illustration, 
dyu  di'ah  dob,  fn'.5t,  in  the  firit  place,  in  the  beginning, 
deh  gilh'gvvaah'goh,  north,  where  the  sun  is  not. 
de'ya  go  g.i'nCis  oh,  she  was  an  eye  wifiiess. 
da'yan  de  ih,  he  is  ignorant,  he  docs  not  know, 
doh  ga'ok  hali,  I  do  not  hear,  do  not  understand, 
doh  sa'gk  hah,   thou  dost  not  hear  or  understand. 
do  wa'ga  do'^n  jo  nih^  I  wish,  desire,  nocd,  want. 


m 


:■%■}■' 


'   1  I 


:'Jr  mtmmmm' 


y^^of^.. 


40 

LESSON  XLVII. 

d«  a'i  vra'ge  has,  one  who  disput«3,  argues,  pleada  ;  hoace  a 
lawyer,  a  pettifogger. 

de  wa'gi  dwTi'nont,  I  hope,  expect. 

deh'gin de'ih,  I  d)  not knjw,  am  ignorant,  unacq[aaiatod. 

deh  syan  de  ih,  thou  dost  not  know,  (Sec. 

dwah  ni'gQ  ah,  our  minds,  inte'.'ect. 

dwah  ni'go  ah'geh,  in  or  on  our  mnJ,  into'lect. 

dgh  ak'nigj'ayundas,  I  do  not  understand,  apprehend,  th» 
meaning. 

deh  sah'ni  go'a  yan  das,  thou  do.st  not  unJer^ftand,  &c. 

deh  a'gh',    it  can  not,  it  isimpossib'e. 

dell'a'gennQh'doh,  I  do  not  know. 

deh  sen'noh  doh,  thou  dost  not  know. 

d^kneh'akhgoh,  I  sha'l  take  the  wrong  one,  err,  miss  the 
mark,  mistake. 

d-J  gi'wa  neh'ak  hogh,  I  will  miss  the  subject  matter.  O^Tho 
'd'  at  the  beginning  of  thcs3  two  words  makes  them  ro- 
fjr  to  something  at  a  distance,  and  so  in  hundreds  of  in- 
stances. 

da'gid'i,  pity  me,  have  compassion  upon  me. 

da'gwan  da,  pity  us,  Imve  compassion  upon  U3. 

da  gek'wa  nont,  give  mc  foo:!,  feed  me. 

dak  noh'gwa  nont,  give  m 3  mi  k  for  food. 

dik  na'nont,  give  me  oi  for  food. 

dak  hTihgwa  nont,  feed  mo  bread. 

dak  ne'ga  nont,  feed  me  water. 

dagy4h'gwa  nont,  feed  mo  tobacco. 

da  geh'wa'u  nont,  food  mo  moat. 

dek  ni'oh,  two  fema'es,  som-timos  (thou:?h  rarely)  anpjod  to 
anima's.  ^  y     ir 

deh  OS  deh,    not  he  ivy,  light. 

de  i'yirs  he,  two  men,'  two  persons  of  whom  one  is  a  man. 

de  gi'yv^i  he,  two  women,  two  fern  I'es. 

dek  nj'yirs  he,  samo  as  the  preceding. 

do  gai'yvs  he,  twoanim  is  cither  ma'e  or  female. 

de  yo'gwoh  da  go,  two  persons. 

de  i'yaii  da  doh,  twopers  >rj:i  proicnt,  in  view,  in  being. 


i^l^MMMMMn 


i^i^JJ^- 


41 

LESSON  XLVIII. 


d^ 


i'g\vegQh,  both  men. 


^j-i  'j 


!•,•»       ii 


Mf 


'^  ti.i»y. 


de  gi'gwe  goh,    and  dek  ni'gwe  goh,    both  the  women,  also 

both  the  animals. 
de  wa'oh  des,   two  long  ears  ;  joined  with  'ji  yah','  (dog,)  it 

means  the  grey-hound ;  with  *ga'on  da  nih'gwih,'  -(horse, ) 

it  means  the' ass.  '        ■  .i   tr-  -  ■"  *      •>  •  . 

de  ya  di,  they  two  are  together,  his  companion.      '    ■  :^  '  ^    ^ 
dejadi,  you  two  are  together,  thy  companion. 
de  anan di,   they  are  together,  they  are  companions,  (many, 

more  than  two.; 
de  yu  di  nah'ge  on'doh  oh,  sheep,  a  load  or  burden  consisting 

of  two  horns  hanging  down.  /       '  ■  '  •- 

don  da'sah  get,  return  thou,  come  back.  '" 

donda'wah  get,  it  returns,  comes  back,  it  retnmed.        :* 
don'da  gwai'wah  sa  gwvs,  do  thou  forgive  us. 
don  da'gwa  yah'da  guli,    do  thou  deliver  us,  help  us  out  again, 
don'  da  gi'wah  sa  gwirs,  do  thou  forgive  me. 
don'da  ya'gwa  dat,  we,  (the  persons  i-peaking,  j  may  or  shall 

stand  up  again. 
don  da'gah  nah  ne'dah,  I  have  repeated  again.  .      '     ^' 

dant  gah'nah  ne  dah,  I  will  repeat  again.  .. 

don  da'yont  his,   she  has  moved   back  again,  tir  Come   this 

way  again,  she  has  approached, 
dandyoont  his,  she  will  move  back  again.     "    '  '       ' '   ■  ;' 
do'ni  sa  ga'nyah  goh'  1   how  much  did  you  pay  for  it'i         '  / 
dwa.nis'hadeh,  that  day,  at,"in,  or  on  that  day. 
dwa  nis'ha  de  nyoh,  those  days,  or  at,  in,  or  on  thasedays.   ^ 
dwa  nis'ha  dek,  that  past  day,  &c. 
dw&  nis  ha  de  nyok,   those  past  days,  &c.       ■  v^.-'^ 

da  gwa'nont,  do  thou  give  us  food,  give  us  to  eat.        ' " ' ' 
de  snoh'ho  nyak,  do  thou  catch  it,  e.  g.  a  ball.  -•     i.  .; 

dajih'yaak,  throw  it,  throw  it  hither.  '    "     ■ 

da  gih'yaak,  throw  it  at  me,  hit  me  with  it,  shoot  me. 
dasaa'dih,  toss  it  hither.    -^  -    't   - 
dae'sadyls,  toss  it  to  him.      '■  '     '^     »  % 
deh  wa'dodyvs,  it  does  not  grow,  it  is  not  growing. 
de  dwa'dodyirs,  growing  of  itself,  spontaneous,  it  grows  again. 

6 


u",  y.'J 


\'/ 


■»!    Ji 1     ■  t\i. 


?       (. 


if' 


i 


t    ' 

t 


4S 

LESSON  XLIX. 

deh'Q  w^h'ni  go  4'nQ  es,  she"  does  not  like  his  opinions,  feel- 
ings, or  purposes.  • 

do  nyo'ni's  het'  ?  how  long  will  it  be  ? 

do  ni  jtq'  1  how  many  ? 

do,  an  .exclamation  of  dislike,  or  of  surprise,  or  for  the  pur- 
pose of  calling  the  attention,  or  of  forbidding. 

dwada'deh  ga,  brothers,  we  are  brothers,  (i.  e.  tht>se  present,) 
they  are  our  brothers,  (referring  to  absent  persons)  ;  a 
polite  form  of  address  in  councils. 

dwa  dangle,    our  friend  ;  mostly  used  of  blood  relations. 

dwa  d4  ngk  shgh,  our  friends,  (speaking  to  them. ) 

de  dwa'da  non  de,  brothers,  our  brethren,  (^speaking  to  them); 
used  in  reference  to  children  of  the  same  parents,  and  to 
members  of  the  same  church,  and  i>f  the  same  clun,  some- 
times, though  more  rarely,  to  people  of  the  same  race. 

de  go'nQ  Q  nyggn,  i  thank,  salute,  or  compliment,  thee. 

de  gwa'ng  g  nyggli  we  thank  thee,  &c. 

de  y  u'ha  gwan  deh,  gap,  openirig,  vacant  space  between. 

deyu'hagwan  de'nygh,  gaps,  cracks,  fissures,  openings,  drc. 

de  yuh'hgs  dah'is  dgh,  gimlet  or  augur,  any  thing  which  makes 
holes  by  turning. 

dus  ga'gh,  near,  close,  nigh  at  hand. 

deyia'isgwat,  slippery. 

deh  tah'gwis  dah,  nothing,  not  any  thing. 

da  gwa'yena'wahs,  do  thou  help  us. 

dyuh'dan  dygh,  it  came  or  went  from  that  place. 

dyv-t  gwah  s^t,  where  the  blood  is  upon  it,  ^r  it  is  bloody. ' 

deh  gi'wa  yan  de  ih,  1  am  not  acquainted  with  the  matter. 

deh  agwai'wa  ySin  de'ih,  we  are  not  acquainted  with  the  mat- 
ter, (^spoken  to  a  third  person.) 

dyun^h'net,  the  sec  nd,  the  thing  which  comes  in  the  second 
place,  the  repetition  of  the  same  thing. 

dagwat'gathuh,  look  thou  upon  us. 

da  s^'ont  huh,  do  thou  pour,  pour  out. 

dent'gayeih,  let  it^beconie  just  right  again,  or  just  as  it  was 
before* 

doh  joh'dyont,  it  is  not  feaful  now. 


[I     I 


i'fc*.»^»iak^^gM^►-g'»«c*3B»'^|>^«^^ 


/■"• 


wa5 


U 

LESSON  L. 

dayagvsradeh'hasdoQh,  we  exerted  our  strength,  (speaking  of 
ourselves  to  others.) 

de jah'do  weh'dah,  do  thou  give,  judge,  or  consider,  decide, 
determine. 

de'4  nan  dah'ni  gQ'4^t  they  are  not  cautious,  do  not  consider, 
do  not  look  out  for. 

dah'de  o  di'da  gwaih'dgh,  they  have  not  spread  out  or  e.\pan<i- 
ed  it,  stretched  it. 

de  wah'da  pwaih'dQh,  it  has  been  unfolded. 

de  yuh'da  gwdih'dgh,  it  is  spread  out,  unfo  ded. 

de  ga  da  gwaih'dgh,  it  has  been  and  still  is  spread  out,  stretch- 
ed, extended. 

de  sa'hat  hes'huh,  thy  light. 

da  yQ'gvva  dos'ho  dogk,  we  will  kneel. 

da  gwa'yon  dyah'se  aak,  da  thou  smile  upon  us. 

dashe'swados'hot  has,  ye  will  kneel  before  him,  (sometimes 
also,  used  imperatively.) 

dyu  da'des*ah  do  ok,  let  it  be  done  faithfully,  or  with  the  ut- 
most zeal,  diligence,  etiort. 

de  ja  gwai'waii  8^  gwvs>  we  forgive,  we  do  back  again  as  we 
have  baen  done  by,    (speaking  of  ourselves  to  anoiiier.) 

dah'de  ja  gvvai'wah'sa  /rwvs,  we  do  not  forgive,  we  do  not  re- 
turn again  the  s.  ane  treatment,  ^spoken  of  ourselves  to 
•another.) 

de jak  hi'wah  sagvva'n  seh,    we  forgive  them,  we  return  the 
'  same  treatment,   &c.,    (^spoken  of  ourselves  to  a  third 
person.) 

de  g4'on  da'g  wah'  goh,  beam  or  plate  in  the  frame  ofa  building. 

deh  go'un  ja'y^n  deih,  1  do  not  know  the  land  or  country. 

de  gii'ah  daad,  1  et  me  run.  • 

de  sa'ah  daad,  run  thou 

dah  a'yu  a'na  hgh,  it  cannot  get  wet. 

da'saat  gah,  do  thou  give  it  up,  let  it  go,  relinquish  it. 

dagwai'waye'isdah,  do  thou  justice  to  us,  fulfil  thy  engage- 
ment With  Us. 

dyiu'i  wah,  on  account  of,  because  of,  for  the  sake  of 

4a  e'B^h'ya  dock*  ilotbou  protect  bim,  take  charge  of  him. 


lis 


.  V*'* 


...f''':ic^'..^. 


u 

LESSON  LI. 


de  yu'dl  non'dah  gQh,  there  is  hope,  it  is  hopeful/  »'%-^'ft*a. *»  if  fs 

da  glh'ahf  hen,  the  hen  kind. 

dyu'hos  gwa'ont,  cow,  the  cow  kind,  neat  cattle,  (so  called  from 
their  chewing  the  cud. ) 

da  se'nyet,  do  thou  send,  or  send  word  by  some  one.        ■   *  -  '^ 

de  ga'4h  sa  oh,  praise,  honour,  glory,  it  is  honourable,  glori- 
ous, &c.         :.^..' V:   ^--    ^  ^    ^.  ';, -/^''i^^ '.-<=?/ riil^ 

deh  a'ga  gwe  nih,  it  cannot,  it  is  impossible. 

deh  o'gwe  nyoh',  it  could  not,  it  was  impossible,  (often,  but 
improperly  used  in  the  present  tense.) 

do'gis  Q  weh,  very  certainly,  strictly  true.  «'    ,, ,    -. 

de'wandoh,  never,  not  ever.  . 

dah  ji'ah,  a  little  while,  soon,  for  a  short  time.      .  .'    ,      ,  ■<],  , 

da  sat'hon  dek,  do  thou  hear. 

de  yu  daah'gont,  bright,  brilliant,  glittering,  shining,  dazzling. 

d4  wah'de  nih,  it  will  be  changed,  or  exchanged. 

da  wan'dih  sa  de  nih,  it  will  turn  round. 

de  ga'ah  sa'Qh  gwah,     the  matter  for  praise,  on  •account  of 
which  honour  should  be  given. 

de  ga'ah  sa'oh  gwa'noh,  the  things,  or  matters,  one  by  one, 
which  furnish  occasion  for  praise. 

de  yu  do' an  jooh,  it  is  necessary  or  needful,  or  desirable.     ,.<, 

da  yu'do'an  jo  ni'ak,  it  will  desire. 

dah'de'yuh  ni'go  a  ge,  doubtless,  there  are  not  two  minds  qr 
opinions  about  it.  .    Ii 

dg'sa  Ih'sa  o'nyo  Qk,  they  will  praise  thee  again. 

deh  a'on  da'o  wa  nan'noh  do  os,  they  cannot  be  compelled. 

de  yo'gwah  sant  hwah',  we  cried,  we  weptj  we  cried  out, (speak- 
ing of  ourselves  to  another. ) 

del  has'hak  dohs,  he  bends,  he  bows  ;  i.  e.  habitually.  r. 

da  e'swat  ha'ah,  you  may  converse,  talk  over  the  matter. 

do'sawada'nahgaah'dah  go'Qk,  it  may  or  should  be  coma 
pared  over  again,  or  have  an  illustration  again,  or  hav^  - 
new  parable  to  explain  it. 

da  a'ga  ne,  he  beholds,  he  sees,  he  is  looking  at  it,     ,,  ,  ' 

de  seh'nyaah,  Ihou  hast  the  charge  of.       ,,  ,^^^    ,^^^.  --f^ 

de  e'se^.  lyraah,  thop  hast  charge  9f  hiptj,    '<  .^,,, .  ^„,  ^^^-^^  ^i, 


J 


m^>im 


'lii^ifmmmmttm 


'y9f.-f 


WMM 


wsm 


<§ 


de iho'yiih  nya dogk,  duthou  protect  herj  take  charge  of  her 
continually. 

d^h'de'wak  ni'gQ  4  ge,  1  doubt  not,  I  have  not  two  minds  or 
opinions  respectinff  it.  - Y        "  •    '  •: 

den  o  dok,  without  end,  endless.  •      . 

de  a'sih  da'ge  oh,  at  his  feet,  (implying  that  his  feet  are  dowii^ 
.  as  when  standing  upon  them.)  '  ■  .f 

deyiuh'hathes'hah,  light.  .    ;  ,,    ;  V  .  '         *;  "^'"^^^ 

deh  o'yan  det'heh  oh,  it  was  not  made  clear,  plain,  manifest. 

de  wa  ga  da'non  dah  goh,  1  had  hope,  it  was  the  cause  or  ground 
of  my  hope. 

deh  o  di'wah'dan  dyoh,  they  did  not  go  on  with  the  business. 

da  gwa'dah  swi'yus  dah,  do ;  ?  ou  prosper  us.  ,        ,1^ 

de  yuh'ni  go'hak,  it  troubles,  it  is  troublesome,  it  is  vexa- 
tious, it  occasiotis  a  feeling  of  loneliness  or  weariness 
of  the  place  where  one  is. 

de  yuh'ni'ggh  hah'gwa  ni,  two  animals  are  troubling  each 
other.  ,      ,.^      .  .     ,      ,  ,,      - .  ,,..,.  ,, 

dwadanodah,  letussmg.  ,     ,     ,  ,.,.. 

dan  dwa'dek  hah'sih,  we  shall  be  separated. 

dant  hw'yah  da'ges  guh,  he  will  nil  him  up  again,  (applied 
literally  to  one  who  is  lying  down,  but  figuratively  to  any 
improvement  of  condition  or  circumstances.) 

deh  ei  wa  gwen  ni  yus'thah,  she  does  not  believe  it,  or  be- 
lieve in  it,  (i.e.  habitually. ) 

^ehe'wanant,  she  does  not  speak,  she  is  dumb.,    .'V     '    ,  vf. 
deh  je'wa  nant,    she  does  not  speak  now,  she  is  dumb  now, 
(implying  that  she  used  to  speak  but  cannot  now.     Thm 
implication  is  conveyed  by  the  *j'  in  the  second  syl- 
lable, and  so  in  hundreds  of  instances.) 
deh  ga'yah,  it  is  not  there,  it  has  not,  there  is  none.       *,    "a, 
dyuhnigo'i  yusdeh,  the  happiness,  or  contentment,  or  bles- 
.,,      sedness  which  is  there  ;    at  or  in  the  blessedness^  i.  e.  at  a 
^  .;^.  ,  distance.     This  idea  cf  distance  from  the  speaker,  iscon- 
**''*'  veyed  by  the  'dy'  at  the  commencement  of  the  wor(5, 
and  so  in  a  large  class  of  words  j  in  others  however,  the 
*  d '  alone  is  prefixed.  ,       , 

dyu  an'jadeh,  the  land  thero>  or  that,  land  or  world,  (see  t|je 
foregoing  definition.) 


«( t. 


'.**'r /V^.V'  ft.'¥X 


■.«r«i5»*^—,-^^^ 


■•'-'  '■<.</•  •«»*■■ 


'^'iMLiJjL  111 


46 


ij^V, 


;*... !/ 


Lesson  lii. 


• -.,<*:  1?  ivf 


P.  I 


i-Mir: 


dyu  an'ja  de  nyoh,  the  land3  or  worlds  there,  (see  foregoing.) 
deh  gai'gaah  huh,  no  where,  in  no  place.  "'  *'  ^  •    .' ; 

de'o  n^n  do' an  jo  nih,  they  desire,  wisli,  need.  * '  '■  "^ 

da  gwa'des  ah'se  aak,  prepare  us,  make  us  ready,  fit  us. 
di  sa'ii^k  da  yah,  at  thy  kingdom,  place  of  abode,  possessions^ 

&c.,  (implying  that  it  is  at  a  distance. ) 
de  dwa'dyah  do'weh  diih'gwah,  the  place  of  judgment,  of  trialf 

of  decision,  the  judgment  throne.  <  ■    ■  i 

disah'swego'gk,  thou  wilt  be  deaf. 

dae'sah  swe'go  ok,  thou  mightest  have  been,  or  mayest  be,  deaf, 
de  ya'gus  ge'e  yoh,  she  is  tired,  she  has  become  weary, 
deyiu'adefi,  valley,  ravine. 

deh  wa'dok  thah,  there  is  no  deficiency,  it  does  not  fall  short. 
dehj6t'vva  dase,  it  does  not  encompass,  enfold,  envelope,  go 

around  it,  now,  (implying  that  once  it  did  do  so.) 
da  gwai'g  nyali,  do  thou  teach  us,  instruct  us. 
dak  ni  go'a  y^n'dah  dah,  do  thou  make  me  to  understand, 
da  gyuh'do  aih,  wash  me,  i.  e.  all  over, 
da  gyah'da  g;^  eh,  cleanse  me,  wipe  away  from  me  \f hatever 

pollutes, 
dasahsent,  descend  thou,  comedown,  fall, 
de yu'do  gwah'dgh,   it  is  or  has  been  distributed,  or 'spread 

abroad,  scattered. 
dwa  yah'da  deh,     we,  us ;  or  at,  to,  or  upon,  us,  (speaking 

among  ourselves.) 
deh  a'go  yah,  she  has  not,  she  has  not  got  it. 
deh  o'noh  dgh,  he  does  not  know,  he  knows  it  not. 
deh'gaye'ah,  it  is  not  done,  it  is  not. so  done, 
daa'yaah  do' wet  hah,  judge,  he  who  decides.  '     "' 

de'wa  de  nyah'doh  ggh,  curse,  cursed, 
deh'sa  ga'yas,  thou  art  not  willing.  '' 

de  dyu'dgh  ho  ga'nyat,  the  place  of  torment,  or  misery,  (spo- 
ken cf  a  place  at  a  distance. ) 
de  yu'dgh  hg  ga'nyat,  wretchedness,  torment, 
deh  gah'has  dis'hiat,  there  is  no  power  or  strengtb* 
deh  gai'wa  gwen  ni'yuh,  it  is  not  true.  '^ 

Aeh  wa'fja  dwen  ni'yuh,   it  is  not  at  liberty^  it  is  not  frw. 


*•*«■'■•■» 


JjIj^^*-'-— '**    #  ♦  >l'"«*'^**'>'^»-%!ii>J 


m'^ttfiimtm 


•M> 


doyu'danQ'yanih'doh,  terrcur,  it  is  terrible,  it  is  a  frighl- 
All  thing. 

deh  e'ykn  de'is,  she  does  not  know,  (i.  e.  habitually.)    ...        , 

diihgaah'ah,  few,  not  many. 

de  dwas'ge'e  ygs,  we  are  fhtigued,  wearied,  tired  out,  (spoken 
among  ourselves  in  reference  to  the  habitual  condition. 

deh'ga  no'gh,  it  is  not  hard,  it  is  not  difficult,  or  it  is  not  v«Uue- 
able,  it  is  worthless.  :,, ,  ' 

de  ah'sQnt  hwvs,  he  cries  out,  he  is  crying  out.  , ' "  ,  - 

de  4'nah  sant  hwvs,  they  are  crying  out. 

deh  jo'nak  dot,  there  is  no  longer  any  opportunity,  (in\plying 
that  there  his  been  heretofore.) 

do  ga'yah  sont,  the  cross. 

deh  gi'wa  gwen  ni  yus'thah,  I  do  not  believe. 

deh'ga  gwe'goh,  not  a  1. 

de  waTgada'nunt,  I  hope,  (implying  both  desire  and  expect- 
ation.) . 

do'dih'ni  go'l  yan  dah'gh,  they  did  not  understand  it. 

dwai'wa  no'gh  gwah,  we  love  it,  we  are  pleased  with  the  mat- 
ter, (spoken  among  ourselves.) 

dwai'wa  ng'es,  we  like  it,  we  are  pleased  with  the  matter,  but 
implying  a  less  degree  of  comp'acenc)^  than  *  dwai'wa- 
no'Qh  gwah, '  (spoken  among  ourselves.)  j  ,.-   ^j, 

diga'dlh,  itwil  fly.  .,    ,^,         ,      ,  y.^.^c  ri 

de  ga'  ah  sa  gh,  glory,  honour. 

dent  hl'noh  dan  dih,  they  will  return,  go  back  again,  come 
back  again,  go  away  again. 

de  sgya'dye  |h,  the  two  things  are  alike,  they  resemble  each 
other. 

deh  waat,  it  is  not  there,  it  is  not  in  it,  it  is  not  contained  in  it. 

da  gy^as'dah,  teach  me,  show  me  how,  instruct  me,  give  me 
the  skill. 

da  go' wan  thvs,  show  me,  show  it  to  me. 

<le  ok'hah  sq  gwah,  he  divided,  he  separated. 

d^h  dyiu'i  wah,  not  on  account  of. 

de  yuh'ni  gg'a  ge,  doubt,  it  is  doubtful,  there  are  two  opinioDSft 

two  minds  in  regard  to  it. 
do'di  gwe'nyos  Qh,  or  *deo'digwe'nyQ8Qh,'  they  were  liot 
able,  they  could  not  do  it. 


-'r 


I 

St: 


m 


i!! 


K    1 

i 


iwl'r^liiilji; 


4^ 


Hi 

Ml 


I 


m'''< 


'\  .lykly* 


LESSON  LIII. 


de  se'ga  ne,  thoii  see&t,  beholdest,  art  looking  at. 
de^  wa'donya'nQh,  it  is  not  moving  about,  it  docgnot  stir,  it 
'*''  *  ismotionless^    ,■   '..^  '     '     ^.v''       I  *   '*■  '•      ;<<-;4-  ^  .' 
dak'yuowih,  tell'me,  do  tliou  tell  hie.  "  •  '  •'  "  *  ^-V?'  i*'- .  , 
dagwa'owih,  do  thou  tell  us.  '""  ^'  '     ''"'^  '  '^  ''"*' 

dyghheh,  we  live,  our  life,    (speaking among  outselves.) 
dvvat  ha'i  neh,  we  are  travelling,  we  are  journeying  (spokeh 
among  ourselves.)  .  / 

deh'dwa  dah'ni  go'ah,  we  are  not  watching  or  looking  to  oui^ 

selves,  '(spoken  among  ourselves.) 
deh'dwah'ni  gy'ali,  we  are  not  expecting,  we  nre  not  look- 
ing out  for  it.       ■   -'  '  \       '  '  ■'. 
deho'yahgah'ha  Qshah,   there  is  no  danger,  it  is  not  dan- 


gerous. 


da  ga'dvvan  deh'dah,  spare  to  me,  do  thou  impart  to  me,  (som^ 
times  used  in  borrowing,  but  oftener  in  begging.)     ' '' '  '■^' 

de  sa'dah  Son  da'i  goh,  thou  art  dark,  thou  art  in  the  darkness. 

dch  ge'ya  oh,  I  do  not  know  how,  I  am  not  skilled  in  it. 

de  ya'guh  ni'goh  haah,  she  is  lonely,  she  is  homesick.  . 

de  yu'da  non'dah  gvveh,  it  is  very  hopeful. 

dyuh'dan  dyoh,  it  came  from,  whence  it  came.     '   •'  •'•' 

deh  gwen'ni  yu,  my  speech  is  not  good,  I  do  not  use  good  words, 
i  am  not  eloquent,  I  have  not  a  good  voice. 

de  yoh'swe  ggh,  she  is  Jeaf,  her  ears  are  stopped,  she  cannot 
hear. 

de  ye'gah  gwe  ggh,  she  is  blind,  she  cannot  see.      '  '' 

deh  wa'do  nyat  hall,  it  yields  nothing,  it  produces  nothing,  no- 
thing grows  upon  it. 

de  yu'de  yah'hih  da'noh,  there  are  hindrances,  one  afler  ano- 
ther, there  is  a  succession  of  difficulties  in  the  way. 

desgai'wa  yii'on  daali,  the  two  things  are  compared  again^  it 
resembles  this  matter  also,  (used  where  repeated  reserft- 
blances  are  pointed  out,  or  two  or  more  illustrations  used  in 

'**'     succession.) 

de j4  noh  sa'ne  ga,  thy  near  neighbour,  you  two  are  near 
■^  ♦^  neighbours,  i.  e.  your  houses  are  joined  together,  or  con- 
tiguous to  each  other.  --     ■.*<. 


'U'f^^] 


\M 


"  ^  M»KpijifHirfiBpj»«wr«».w» 


«11*.'- 


"'OSMiBr- 


f-l»  ^)i-*«.- 


^ir-'*' 


'■i.l 


.', 


m 

de'4  n4  uQh'sa  nc  gl,  they  afi'neig)ib(Min,  4ee  ^^   h-- 

de  WV8  hht  twenty. 

dewrntsha^,  tw()d(lys.■^''>^*^    •'*''■•■'♦•     "    ''^ 
de'odiyah'sontt  they  crossed  it,  they  made  their  marie, 
deh  wat'gah  w|h,  it  ^vas  not  left,  or  giveaup.   tvv j?:  /i-  ; : 
deh  ds'f  Qh,  hot  at  all,  no,  not  by  any  mean& '  ^  .  Si'''    '>' 
da  wah'aent,  it  fell,  it  falls.  ^^'1  m ^  '^;  t*-^V"f  i^ 

de  yu'Jah  son  da'i  gQh,  darkness,  it  is  dark.  '•'•:,  u  j:  .  '^ 
de  a'ga  ne,  in  his  sight,  he  is  looking  at  it.  1 1  '  •  y  v  ^  ^  ^  ^. 
da  gwah'ni  go'i  ytis,  do  thou  satisfy  us,  make  us  happy.  ^<'' 
da  gwl'nok,  do  thou  c^U  us.  " ' ' 

dagwaat[gah,  do  thou  give  us  up,  let  us  go,  relinquish  us.  ^ 
da  gwaat  gah,  do  thou  give  us  up,  let  us  go,  &c.    The  use  of 

the  *  n '  at  the  end  of  the  word  instead  of  *  h,'  makes  Ch* 

imperative  much  stronger.  •^' "  r  <,;  .v 

do  gat,  perhaps,  or.  (do  gat'  gih'sh&h,  or  perhaps.)  ."^'' *^*i;(p 
deh  o'o  gat,  *it  is  not  c^ear,  distinct,  plain,  e?ident.  ■>  ' '  *>•  > 
de'o'w^  yah'sont;  they  crucified  him.  tV  .»•.,«  <*. 

dwah'ni  gQ  &h  gls  hQh^  our  minds,  in  our  minds,  (among  our- 

selves.) 
deyuh'nigQh'g\nyat,    unpleasant,  troublesome,  that  whidi 

makes  it  desirable  to  get  away  from  any  place,  Icmely, 

homesick. 
de  Q'wa^lh  sa  o'nygh  gwah,  that  for  which  they  praise  him, 

that  which  is  used  in  praising  him.  /::  .■ 

de  a'lh  si'oh  ggh,  he  is  worthy  to  be  praised.  '  '  .''  * 
de  o'nod  hak'dQ  gk,  they  are  stooping  down,  bowing,  letming 

forward.    •  «'■  v'^rTv-o'^Mi  J-n^'M  ,nwv  >.'^...->  •,  ■ 

deh  o'di  y|h,  they  have  not,  they  have  not  got  it.     ;.   ■       — 

deh  ak'ni  gont,  I  am  a  fool,  have  no  mind  wr  wisdonb^ ^' 

deoh'nigont,  he  is  a  fool,  &c.  'f^'j^; 

deh  a'guh  ni'gont,  she  is  a  fool,  &e. 

deh  sah'ni  gont,  thou  art^  fool,  dro. 

deh  Swati'ni  gont,  ye  are  fools,  dsc.  .      >'  •; 

deh  o'dih  ni  gont,  they  are  fools,  6se. 

d4  dyo'gwan  nok'dah,  it  will  come  suddenly  upon  us,  or  hap* 

pen  to  us,  (speaking  among  eursefves. ) 
deQ<lD'anjo'nQiiih,  he  needed  those  things,  or  be  desired  or 
■  ■-,■»  wishm them.  ..!.-<■-      :j.  .  .;,,;^  ,*■.,..,..,•..  ^..^y.. 

7 


<•?•»■; 


,-,T  j'  •)  ' 


-■*»»»'« 


si-y^.w-:-- 


iS^S^uihMHi'Mm 


40 


^% 


m' 


r!* 


dodyaoh'noh,  it  is  less,  e.g.  the  diseaja  is  Ims  violeit,Uw 

siiik  person  is  better.  f.'v^::«fV,-,   .,  :t«-  •  »j^,  f  f.^y.t?-,?,  ';iR 

dah'do  dyaoh'nvht  it  is  no  less,  the  sick  person  is  no  bott^. 
deh'yp  heh',  it  is  not  olive,  it  does  not  live.  ,  .     ,> 

dh yoh'n jh jah'e syOQk,  it  will  gnash  the  teeth.      -  .*.  r 
de  yu'dyh  gwnah'g'wah,  sulphur,  brimstone.  •-« 

de  gS*^  we  oda  hgh,  chain,  rods  or  wires  linked  together 
dak  ni'noh*  buy  of  me. 

dwat  goat'huh,  let  us  look,  let  us  see,  let  us  see  iU 
da' eh,  he  is  coming. 

da'yjh,  sheiscom^ng.  '  '     r    i/  ir,  •    '. ,  •.  ,       *  '. 

da'neh,  they  two  are  coming.    •  ^  '       v  /        ■ 
da'4  neh,  they  are  coming.  .  :?.  '    i  ; 

da'w^neh,  they  (women;  are  coming,      f      -  '  •    .♦• 

dwa  dek'ho  nih,  let  us  eat. 

de  Bgai'wa  It,  let  it  be  broken  or  destroyed ;  it  is  brokeOf  (let* 
.v,'     troyed,  or  taken  in  pieces  again.  r    ,    i  ;•    vi 

dejak',  cut  it  off.  break  it  off.  '   - 

.•dwai  his',  we  will  move  along,  let  us  move  along, 
dyuhs.iah',  the  beginning,  at  the  beginning,  commencement, 
deh  o'gwe  nyQh,  it  cannot,  it  is  not  ab  e,  it  is  impossible, 
dchjo'gwenyoh,  i  cann  it  now,  it  is  not  able  now,  (imply* 

ing  that  it  has  been  able  heretofore. )  .. 

deh  jo'w^  nant'ah,  not  one  word.  :\- {■   .      ,'"' 

<i^h ah'gw;s d4h,  not  any  thing.  -  "■■'-'  'V    v  ,,( 

'  de  ji'yak,  do  you  two  cut  it  off,  or  break  it  in  two. 
d4  wan'dyak,  it  will  break  in  two,  it  will  be  cut  off  or  bro» 

ken  inlo  two. 
deh  dye'i  wa  yeih,  she  is  unjust,  unrighteoui*,  she  does  not  fuN 

fi  her  promise, 
dye'i  wa  ye  ih,  she  is  faithful;  she  is  just,  righteous,  she  keeps 

her  word.  *  ,  ,.» 

dwa'gah,  we  see,  we  perceive.  •  '    • 

<iwag4h,  let  us  see,  let  us  perceive.  •  ;    :. 

'd6yont'yus  gwi  nes,  she  creeps,  a  creeper. 
d^yQ  non  da'gwiin  de'nyoh,  streets,  open  spaces  in  a  city. 
4wa'di'wah  baasd^gh,  let  us  take  a  strong  hold  of  the  matter^ 


i 


■■.*"^  ».j**ii" 


'«(*•" " 


rS 


4fh'Q  gwai'wa  g,l,  we'do  not  se«  the  matter  or  cireumitance,  or 

have  not  seen  it. 
deo'ddin  do'nyah  doh,  he  did  not  mock  him.  '»    ^ '   '» -~y■m^  ^ty 
deh'ga  dah'ni  go'^h,  I  do  not  expect*  look  for,  anticipate,    t ;!; 
deoh'gw&h,  he  took,  he  took  it  up.  ^,.,     .  .    .>,.: 

deJAoh,   both. 

dftkhe'yadogwat,  I  will  scatter  her  or  them,  I  will  diiper«» 
rjj.them,  spread  them  about  in  all  directions.  '  X* 

deh  gVhanis,  1  am  not  afraid.      \v.     ,     *  •?' '    '  -v-  •> 
deh  stfl'ha  nie,  thou  art  not  afraid.  4  ,  W  v'K;.4 

d4  yiu'js  guh,  it  will  slip,  it  will  slide,  it  will  slue, 
de  ye'sas  nyieh,  she  will  take  charge  of  thee,  take  care  of  thee, 
de  o'gdy^ll,  heha^  no  expense,  no  debt,  no  credit.        ; 
di^yu'n^h  net,    it  repeats,  it  doubles,  it  is  a  repetitk>n,  oir 

doubling, 
deh  gai'way^n'djih  ggh,  it  is  pot  duty,  there  is  no  obligation, 

i.  6 ,  to  do  so  and  so,  it  does  not  belong  to,  it  is  not  the  pro- 

vinceof.        ■*';;,,»,      ■>•    '•  ■'•■Jl'-'}' 

de  gai'yis  dgh,  it  is  mixed,  it  is  mingled,  the  two  things  are 

mixed  or  mingled. 
da  gwa'nQk  do'thvs,  do  thou  give  us  opportunity,  do  thou  give 

us  room  or  space. 
deh  Q'gwah  nig*)  wa n|h,  we  are  not  wise,  our  minds  are  not 

deyus'ha  ge,  two  years.  . 

deh  o'gwa  yah'iiih  oh,  we  have  not  erred,  we  haye  not  madte 

a  mistake,  we  have  noi  ,u>ne  wrong.  ;  .  '  i' 

deh  dyiuh'saah,  it  has  n<  >  beginning,  there  is  or  has  been  no 

commencement  to  it.  .■■  ^^  ,        ;     ..       . 

d^vat'hedak,  day  before  yesterday.  •  '' 

dwat  he'dak  shQh'ot ,  a  few  days  ago. 
deh'ska  ngh,  not  well,  not  peaceful,  not  free,  not  gratuitous. 

dega'ohdage,  two  oare.   ; 

dyyk  hi'nos,  they  callus.  '         • 

deyok'higa'ne,  they  are  looking ot  us.  '  '' 

dyagfji'wah,  on  her' account.  .......       .,  -    _p  ■- ''■} 

dyiu  da  gwah,   it  was  choeon,  it  was  selected  from  among  thcro. 
deh'wih,  I  di  notthink,  itis  notmy  opinion.  v  :  ' 

disk  dat,  I  will  stand  up  again. 


; 


I 


-;;,■!  i^g 


:':^^j^' 


"**  ii  hirrrriitiiii  ii*'*iiniii;SjjMijifi'rTiliMlllll»i 


i'.>  ,^'s^^l.:*ii^<.•yKi:^■^  :■%'/. 


LESSON  LV. 


deswak,  doyetake  itup.     .,.:;; 

dehoa'lmeh  gweh,  it  is  not  to  be  expected,  it  is  not  hope(tiIr 

there  is  no  hope  of  it 
deh  ja'gus  haeh,  she  does  not  expect  it  again,  she  is  not  looking 
*      out  now,  (implying  that  she  was  doing  so  befiye.) 
dak  yu'nya  noh,  tell  me,  be  telling  me,  tell  nie  stories,  relate 

to  me  incidents. 
dlndyQh'nook,  it  will  remove  away  from,  it  will  be  taken 

away, 
dwai'waek,  let  us  take  hold  of  the  matter  together,  let  us  to» 
gether  go  forward  with  the  business.  . .     ,  ,  <,  <  ,'. 

de  yu'di  ah,  there  is  a  difference.  j,  y  ,,  .<       j;. 

dah'de'yu  di'ah,  there  is  no  difference, 
dowe'nooh,  it  is  another  thing,  it  is  quite  another  thin^,  itif 

a  different  matter,  the  two  are  unlike.  ; 

dyut  hgh',  it  is  the  thing,  it  is  the  same  thing, 
deh'dyut  hoh,   it  is  another  thing,  it  is  not  that,  it  is  not  ths 

same. 
dah  de'dyut  hgh,   it  is  changed,  it  is  not  the  same  thing  that 

itwas- 
deh  a'gat  hoh,  I  have  no  connection  with  it,  I  have  nothing  to 

do  with  it 
dwat'hon  daad,  let  us  hear,  let  us  obey.    .  .     .■,--.  ..•   ! 

de'yiui'wage,  two  things.  ,  .   v      1 

deh'so  gaah,  no  one,  no  person.  .;. 

deh  a'dok  hah,  he  does  not  see,  he  is  blind, 
de  yiu'ih  oh,  it  is  worn,  it  is  ragged,  it  is  tattered,  it  is  torn, 
de  ye'jTsdo'ak  thah,  tongs,  things  to  pinch  fire  with, 
desgya'dye  ah,    the  two  things  are  alike,  they  resemble  each 

other. 
de  sya'dye  ah,  the  two  persons  are  alike,  they  resemble  each 

other, 
de  yut'hweh  no  nih,  round.  :  -  ; 

de  w|h'y&h  es'has  h|,  two  thousand,  2000.  •  - 

deh  o'ni  y  Qh,  it  is  not  hard,  it  is  not  firm,  substantial, 
del)  io'ni  yoh,  it  is  not  now  firm,  &c.,  (implying  that  it  was  so 
before. 


'I     i 


■J 


"■^ 


rwB  00 


dtyu'dah  ne  g|  Qh,  it  is:  broken  open*  it  is  torn ;  apj^ied  ftlao 

to  the  bursting  of  an  abscess,  or  the  opening  of  an  ulcer  ; 

,  it  is  ruptured.  .  ■  J. 

^  waQ'd^h  ne  gaah,  it  will  burst,  be  ruptured,  6ic 


both 


It 


degan'dyiuhgwaj4'Qh,  both  parties,  both   assemblies, 
,.       congregations,  from  *dejaQh/  both,  and   *gan 

gwah,'  parly,  multitude.  ,      v. 

deyushakdyoh,  itiscrooked,  it  isbent.      .  •.     .-^V/',. 

deyut'yukdah'Qh,  itisdull  -  .    ,:?. 

de  yiuh'gwah,  pulse,  it  beats,  it  throbs,  it  pulsates,  it  thun^ 
deh  a'dis  ha'nis,  they  are  not  afraid. 
4a  Q'di  j4'<)nt, .  their  places  are  op  the  opposite  sides  of  the  ^nq^ 

^,.,  fire.     .:..,:     ■  ,      .....' 

de  wah'hoont,  it  is  joined  together. 

de  9wah'hoont,  it  is  joined  together  again,  it  is  mended,  i.  e.* 

after  having  been  broken  apart, 
deh  o'yah,  he  has  not,  he  has  not  got  it.  •  *      ■        -*. 

deh  wah'dya  weeh,  it  is  not  incompatible ;  (used  in  referenc« 
to  medicines  1,  it  will  not  interfere  with  the  action  of  the 
medicine,  it  is  not  dangerous  to  use  together  with. 
de  ya'go  do'i^n  jo uih,,  she  wishes,  she  desires,  she  has  need  of* 
deyg'gwa  do'^njo  nih,  we  desire,  need,  wish,  «Sic. 
dyg  gwa'da  ties' ah  dgh,  we  exerted  ourselves  to  the  utmost,  we 

used  ourselves  up.  ,    , 

da  sa'dyient  huh,  do  thou  pull, 
da'a  non  dah'no'Qh  gwa^k,  they  will  love  one  another. 
deJQ'gwadi'wahsugwahseh,  we  are  forgiven. 
deJQ'gwadi'wahsil'gwahseeh,  we  have  been  forgiven  again, 
deha'gwadg'esygh'gwaneh,  we  are  not  beggers,  we  are  not 
begging,  we  Uo  not  cisk  favours,  we  do  not  beseech,  we 
have  not  come  a  begging, 
da'di'ahsa  onyogk,  they  ought  to  praise,  extol,  commend, 
honour.  .  •  .   .     - 

de  ya'gwas  da  hah,  we  cry,  we  weep, 
de  yak' hih  nyaah,  we  take  care  or  charge  of  them, 
deyuh'dagwa'ihda'ngh,  the  things  are  spread  out,  unfolded, 
expanded,  stretched  out,  one  after  another,  e.  g.,the  sails 
of  a  vessel  are  spread  out. 
ie  se'hat  het,  do  thou  light  it,  do  thou  make  it  light. 


>. 


■*i 


IV, 


1   4 


i 


'■m 


<r.i: 


LESSON  LVI 


.♦    M- 


1f  :&:i 


^  yudo'iinjo'o  ftk,  it  will  be  needful  or  necessary. 

dehak'hiya'dQ  e'syo^  gwah'seeh,  we  have  not  pray«d  far 
'    them,  or  begged  for  them.  ..'    .  •  -    ..  > 

d4  gali'sai'yat,  it  will  hasten  it.  ^j  >   .j 

daa'gah  sai'yat,  it  may  hasten  it.  V 

da'o  fa'ga  nak,  that  they  might  look  at  thee.  ''       '    r 

da'ye  saga  nak,  that  she  might  look  at  thee.        - 

desah'sihda'gegh,  at  thy  feet,  (implying  that  the  feet  ar* 
down,  as  upon  the  floor  or  ground.; 

de'yo  gwa'd4  non  dah'gwa  ngh,  we  hope  for,  we  are  hoping 
for  them,  i.  e.,  the  things,  spoken  o£;  (spoken  of  our- 
selves to  another.) 

dwah  dan'dyo  neh,  we  are  about  starting,  (spoken  among  our* 
selves.) 

dwah'dandih,  let  us  go,  let  us  start.  ■    ,  ^ 

d|  an'di  gah'sa  nis'hah  syoh,  they  will  shed  tears. 

de  o'dl  na'yun  dirsgh,  he  did  not  pray. 

d4dwa'dQhet,  it  will  come  to  life  again. 

de  o'nan  da'non  dah'gwa  ngh,  they  hope  for  them,  i.  e.y  the 
things. 

do'sa  Q  wa  nos'dah  has,  they  might  cry  or  weep  for  them  again. 

de  dyu'dah'son  da'i  goh,  there  is  darkness  there,  at  or  in  that 
dark  place. 

da'e  gQh'sa  ga'n5,k,  I  was  looking  upon  his  face. 

de  gefi'ny  aah'gwa  ngh,  my  business,  my  calling,  my  vocation, 
the  matters  which  I  have  charge  of. 

de  wa'gyah  do'a  ggh,  it  presses  upon  me,  it  squeezes  me/  it 
compresses  me. 

d4  wa'gyah  dah'gwah  dvk,  it  will  lift  me  up,  raise  me,  elevate 
me,  hold  me  in  an  elevated  posi  ion. 

d|  wa'gyah  dah'gwat,  1  shall  be  raised  up,  die. 

do  ye'chi  yas'da'ni  ak,  weep  ye  for  them,  i.  e.  in  future. 

d4  ye'chi  yos'da'ni  ak,  ye  will  weep  for  them. 

.  de  siies'swas'da  has,  cry  or  weep  for  him,  cry  or  weep  before 
him. 

deh'o  da&h'go'dirs  oh,  it  did  not  shine,  it  was  not  brighter  bril- 
liant, g.ittering,  resplendent 


*fe^ 


■\";,j;'-7;r;.:*,-  "■  ■,  „7"'i'\ 


;  ?■  ■,-n''>>'-' •  ""-■"*^-~  . 


d4  djq'gwhi'nQk  dvkf  it  wil}  call  us  again. 

dyu  da'm  ni,  the  origin  of  a  thing,  the  first  commencemetiti 
:    that  from  wlueh  it  sprung. 

de  ynt.'gat  hw§,h,-  he  did  not  see  thee,  he  did  not  call  upon  or 

»:        ineel  with  thee.  .:>'';; 

de'yu  d^4h'gon  dQh'  it  shines  upon,  it  reflects  the  light,  it  glit- 
ters, it  gistens;  (applied  frequently  to  the  trees  or 
mountains  reflecting  the  light  of  the  rising  or  setting  sun. 

dyiuhjih'gdweh'saQh,  it  is  covered  with  clouds,  it  is  clouded 

'.'.      over.,  ..,■•.•,.■•, 

dewa'gadah'sondaik'danih,    it  darkens  me,  makes  it  dark 

around  me,  it  darkens  my  mind. 
da  wa'ge  hat'hes  dQh,  it  enlightened  my  mind,  it  has  made  it 

light  about  me. 
d|  yQ  gwah'ni  go'ak  hah  sih,  it  will  separate  juSt  divide  oiir 

minds,  (spoken  among  ourselves.) 
dwa  da'di  wis  irs,  let  us  agree  together,  let  va  resolve,  let  ua 

make  a  covenant  with  each  other,  let  us  promise  among 

ourselves, 
dwado'nv?'       u   our  lungs,  our  breathing  apparatus. 
dlye'gaiiJ  '    :  ilh'syg  nyQQh,  she  will  be  shedding  tears, 

weeping, 
de  ye'^mh  sa  nis  hah'syg  nygh,  she  is  weeping,  she  is  shedding 

tsars. 
d|  jot  wa  da  66  ak,  it  will  surround,  it  will  go  aronnd  or  about  it 

again, 
dak'ni  gQ'a  yan  dah'dlh,  make  me  to  understand,  explain  it  to 

me,  teach  me,  instruct  me.  ;. 

dyiuh  sa'was  oh,  it  was  begun,  it  had  been  begun,  it  began, 
da  wa'nTs  ha  de'nyon  dyieh,      the  days  will  be  coming  ono 

after  another,  at  those  future  successive  days, 
da  o'ah  sa  o  nyQoh,  he  will  praise  him,  it  will  praise  him. 
dwa'danodah'gwah,  our  song,  our  tune,  our  musical  instru- 
ment, 
des  she'dwa  ng'o  nygh'gwah,  we  give  him  our  thanks, 
de  yu'ni  dyuh'gwak  hah'sQh,  the  assembly  is  divided,  the  mul- 
titude are  separated  into  two  parties. 
de  dwa  yu'on  dak,  let  us  compare  it,  let  us  ino  a  compariMitpr 

illustrate  nj.  .      .3  ' 


^■^i^'!«»j,.Aig,j;jMi!'i"iiii|i!ji8MliiiffliMiM 


LBSSON  LYII. 


^'.i;  d^- 


?.;:■ 


V*<l»"«Mt-'    .■<•• 


des  she'dwa  dq'q  nyoh  gwaak,  l6t  us  thank,  him,  i.  e.,  contin« 

iially  or  habitually,  l^t  us  go  on  thanking  hii^.     *?!»'*^  :  ''^ 
da'adi'ondak,   that  they  may  have  a  covenant  or  treaty  of 
friendship,  that  they  may  b  ;  on  terms  of  frictndly  inter- 
course or*  j/respondenco. 
de  wah'de  nyg'gwa  Qh.  it  changesi  it  is  in  the  habit  of  chan« 
■ '"  ■     ^'"g» '"  the  act  of  changing.  * 

de  ya  go  gah'sah  dg  nyQh,  she  will  be  shedding  tears,  dhe  will 

be  weeping.  • 

daye'chiaah,  bring  them,  or  her. 
da  ye'chi  a'weh  dvk,  bring  them  along,  or  bring  her  along  with 

you. 
d|  jit'hdk,  you  two  talk  about  it,  discuss  it. 
da'yu  diah'gon  dak,  it  will  glitter,  glisten,  or  shine  brightly, 
da'wadg  gut,  it  mayor  might  pierce  through,  penetrate, 
vda  wa'dQ  nyat,  it  originated,  it  was  that  from  which  it  sprang, 
de  yu  daah'gcn  da  dyiehs,  it  is  glittering,  shining  brightly,  be* 
ing  brilliant,  (implying continuance  of  ihe  state  or  actioUi 
»         like  the  termination  *  ing*  in  English,  and  also  that  it  is 
along  or  round  about,  or  among  other  things  that  it  is  go- 
ing on.)       _  '*   ' 
i^unt'gaat  gah,  T  will  rise  or  get  up  again. 
d4  '"^'gyah  do'weh  dvk,  it  will  judge  me,  or  decide  upo.n  my 

case,  or  condemn  me,  or  pass  sentence  upon  me. 
d|  iv^'g'X  ddt,  it  will  meet  me,  it  will  come  upon,  befal  me, 

come  in  my  way.  ''' 

da'di  ya^'dr^h  si'aah,  they  are  standing  close  together,  standing 

in  a  crowd, 
de  ya'godo'unjo'nonih,    she  needs  these  things,  they  need 

these  things,  or  several  things. 
de  yu  do'un  jonih,  it  desires,  it  needs,  it  is  necessaiy^  for  it. 
dwat  gwah'sah,  o\ir  blood, 
dwah  has'dis  huh,  our  strength. 
de  wa'dQ  gut' hah,  it  passes  through,  it  penetrates,  it  pierces 

through.  '     • ' 

'^  ga^Q  wa'nyiuh,  it  crosses,  it  lies  crosswise,  the  things  lie 
crosswise. 


"*yj".i  rj»ii«*tiwiwinwiiiii»i  »MK» 


---■T--r  ■  '-,:.r-i>r-; 


-ik. 


degantVorw^dontt  or*  deganli'gQsdODty   it  has  two  wio^ 

upon  .. 

iip.  ahit',  bt eak  it  in  pieces.      "  •       .-^     v.  ,   i..|v»,.vr^*,flr;. 

de  swat'waji  nyak,  increase  ye  and  multiply.         ■''■-'■\-is 

d|  swat'wa  ji'nyak  lie'dyieh,  or  d^  swat'wa  ji'nyalc  gQ'on- 
dyleh,  you  will  be  increasing  and  multiplying. 

:^e  a  a  nant'wa  ji'nyak,  let  them  increase  and  multiply. 

dyuhdoh'sgaefi. .  nineteen,  or  nine  over  the  ten  or  number  of 
tens  mentioned,  as,  'dewvs'h4  dyuhdoh'sgaeh,  twenty- 
nine,  cVc.        ., .,  ,      . 

de'yoga,  between.  ;       ,'1 

deh  a'yah  da'ak,  he  was  not  there,  he  was  not  present. 

deh  a'yali'daak,  he  was  not  by  the  side  of,  or  near  by  him  or  it 

daswa'dadas'huak,  look  out  tor  yourselves,  beware. 

de  wa'disdo'uils,  it  was  printed,  they  printed  or  pressed  it. 

deh  sh.i'ya  oh,  he  does  not  know  how  now,  (implying  that  ho 
did  before. 

dega'nondo'ga,  between  two  towns,  used  also  in  some  cases 
for  the  streets  of  a  city,  i.  e.,  the  space  between  the  two  di- 
visions of  the  town  on  each  side  of  the  street. 

dwalini'go  i  yu,  we  are  pleased,  satisfisd,  happy. 

deh  gah'nigo'i  j'us'hu  na  geh,  pleasure,  or  satisfaction,  or 
happiness,  docs  not  dwell  or  abound.  •        .<  ' 

dehga'nageh,    it  does  not  dwell  or  abound. 

dyu  i'wa  ni  yoh,  it  is  a  iirm,  durable  or  substantial  matter,  (spo- 
ken of  something  at  a  distance. 

dan  dwaohda'ds  Qk,  it  will  sound  again,  it  will  be  blown 
again. 

deh  sgat'gaah  huh,  it  is  nowhere  now,  it  does  not  exist  »ow» 
(implying  that  it  did  exi.st,  or  was  somewhere  before.) 

deh  ga'e  yos,  it  is  not  mortal,  it  does  not  die. 

do'sas  dat,  rise  up  again,  stand  up  again.  « 

deh  je'gah,  she  does  not  see  again,  or  she  does  not  now  see, 
(implying  th.'it  she  did  before.) 

diga'nehyuk,  it  shall  or  will  bruise  or  jam. 

da  jak  hi'wah  sa  gw\rs,  we  will  forgive  them.  =' 

don'da  gwa  yali'doh  no'ok,  take  us  away  from,  or  out  of  (h© 
way  of,  remove  us  away. 

dwat  .^gn'nis  vs,  we  meet,  we  are  in  the  habit  of  mc«ting. 

8 


if 


I' 


MMtiiiMiiiiyiii 


^M^lS^hsttiEfib  "^ 


#; 


I 


' '.'!}  "' 


:N'..- 


LESSON  LVIII. 


din  dwa'dtth  gwa'4h,  that  month  which  will  be,  or  thatmooo* 
at  or  in  that  future  month.  ;     •' 

de  yu'dis  do' a  ggh,  it  was  printed,  it  was  pressed. 

da'adi'yah  do  wet,  they  may  or  might  judge,  decide,  deliberate 
upon. 

da'a  di'dva,  they  might  bring  to  a  stand  or  put  a  stop  to,  al«P, 
make  to  stand  up. 

dant  geh',  I  will  come  back,  I  will  return. 

dachheh',  thou  wit  return. 

dantheh',  he  will  return. 

d|  dy^h'f  she  will  return. 

da  gwa'nont,  feed  us,  give  us  food. 

dewa'diyugwaiidanoh,  notices,  things  published,  matters 
spread  abroad,  one  after  another. 

dlya'gwaya'yak,  we  will  cross  the  water,  (of  ourselves.) 

dus  g4h,  near,  near  to. 

dwus'yo  nih,  let  us  make,  let  us  create. 

de  ji'dv/a  ye'a  ak,  let  us  become  similar,  let  us  be  alike. 

do  wa  di'dah,  they  fly,  flying  fowl. 

de  wan'nont  yus'gwi  nes,  they  creep,  they  crawl,  i.  e.  tha 
creatures. 

daswen'nohdo'niak,  do  ye  bear  rule  over,  control,  or  exer- 
cise authority  over. 

de  wan'nan  da'wa  nyeh,  they,  (i.  e.  the  creatures,)  walk  about, 
or  go  from  place  to  place,  they  are  moving  around  here 
and  there. 

de  gfi'jit  gwa  ya'gah,  it  has  a  green  colour,  (spoken  principal- 
ly of  the  grass  and  herbs  in  the  fields.) 

dy-Kdi  sa'wah  ggh,  in  the  beginning,  at  the  commencement 

deti'Q  do'dyg,  nah,  it  had  not  grown,  it  was  not  grown. 

defi."os  d9.'on  dyeh  do'nah,  he  had  not  caused  it  to  rain. 

dyo  hit'^lh  qI),  the  water  came  forth  from,  there  was  a  foun- 
tain fthere. 

dj^'dg  ni,  it  produced,  it  was  produced  from  it. 

da  ah'nya4Jh,..  he  may  or  should  take  charge  of  the  work,  or 
labour,  perform,  or  attend  to  the  business. 

dl'as  nyeh',  ijfi«hall  or  should  keep  or  take  care  of. 


f  or 


59 

^h'wiyut  it  w  not  good.  ' 

de  shoh'wa'i  gQh,  he  closed  up  the  flesh  again. 

dya  wan'det  gaa  deh,  it  is  pleasant,  delighttul  or  amusing,  thvre. 

deh  gaah  gwaah  gQ'gwa,  towards th "i  north,  northward. 

de  yuh'hat  hes'ha  gQ,  in  the  light. 

da  yu'hodQ'on  dyieh,  there  is  a  floor"  the  flood  is  rising. 

da  yus'da'on  dyo'on  dyieh,  it  is  raining,  the  rain  is  coming. 

da  yu'doh  da'on  dyieh,  the  waves  are  rolling  this  way. 

da  gyah'dah  set,  hide  thou  me,  conceal  me. 

da  gii's'de  is,  take  thou  care  of  nie. 

deh  dyu'ngk  dot,   there  is  no  opportunity  there,  there  it  no 

room  there, 
deh  sgat'gah  wah,  thou  hast  not  given  me  up,  or  left  me,  or  let 

me  go  ;  thou  dost  not  give  me  up,  or  leave  me,  or  let  me  go. 
dak  ni'gQ  a'ni  yad,  confirm  thou  or  strengthen  my  mind, 
dak  ni'gQ  a'ni  yado  an  dyieh,    do    thou   be  confirming    or 

strengthening  my  mind, 
dak  noh  a'weh  Sah,  cover  thou  my  head, 
don  da'gwat  gah,  do  thou  dismiss  ui*,  let  us  go,  or  give  us  up 

again. 
d|  gwah'nya  dook,  I  will  take  charge  of  you,  will  protect  you.> 
da  gwa'no  het,  do  thou  fill  us,  or  fill  us  up. 
daje'naah,  do  thou  take,  accept,  take  hold  of. 
da  gwa'ahsa'onyQQh,  we  will  praise  thee, 
dya' wah  oh,  always,  continually. 
de  we'nahshoh,  there  arediflerfnces,  different  kinds., 
dasni'eh,  you  two'/Vill  die,  you  two  sha  1  die. 
daji'swadye'ak,  you  shall  be  alike,  you  shall  or  will  resembJe 

each  other, 
de  o'nont  gah'gwaih'shoh,  their  eyes  were  opened, 
do'di  nah'da  ngh'son  dgh,  they  fastened  the  leaves  together, 
dyo  gaa'wi,  she  gave  to  me. 

dok  ni  goh  ga'hat  hull,  it  deceived  me,  it  overturned  my  wisdom, 
de  wade  nyah'doh  gob,  cursed, 
deh  ya'de  as'gwah,  they  two  were  not  ashamed. 
dSh  sat'haak,  thou  shalt  go,  thou  wilt  go,  or  walk,  or  travel.   ■ 
de  dwa'dah  n6oh  gwah,  we  lovt  one  another, 
de  ya  g^vais'do  aas,  we  print,  we  press,  (spoken  of  ourselves.) 
deh'dj^agodye'ah  dgh,  she  does  not  first,  or  in  the  first  plaee. 


'» 


i* 


«'' 


s'flsr'W] 


a5«53RS?Se?5WnH 


,•;«•'. 


LESSON   LVIX. 


I    '■ 


A'  'l>r 


dae  swa  do'an  jos,  you  may  or  might  wish,  desire,  or  need.      / 
dun  di'swat  gat'hwah  sek,  you  will  look  back  from,  (i.  e.  habit- 
ually.) '  '  .  '  »v 
dun  di'swat  gat'huh,  you  will  look  back,  you  will  behold  or  sea 

again  from  thence. 
deh  dyu'i  wah'heh  gii,  it  did  not  cause  it,  it  did  not  take  place 

on  account  of  it. 
deh  o'yr.n  dvk,  it  had  not,  it  did  not  have  it. 
de  yiu'h'hathe'gaak,  let  there  be  light,  (implying  that  light 

did  not  previously  exist.) 
de  viiih'hat  hes'oh,  there  was  h'p;ht.  ;  '   •) 

deok'hahsQ,  he  divided,  he  separated, 
do  wa'doh  da  ah,  let  there  be  a  firmament,  or  an  expanse,  or  on 

open  space. 
de  wah'ne  gak'hah  sih,  let  it  separate  or  divide  the  waters  into 

two  divisions. 
de  yu'doh  da  hoh,  firmament,  expanse,  extended  space  between, 
de  yuh'hat  he  nyok,  let  there  be  lights. 
da  yuh'hat  he  nyoh,  let  them  give  light, 
da  yuh'hat  hes'duhgc/gk,  let  it  enlighten,  or  give  light  to  or 

upon. 
de  sgya'dwa  nan  dye'ah,  the  two  languages  are  alike,  the  words 

are  similar  to  each  ether, 
dwell  dah'gvvah,  it  proceeds  from  it,  the  thing  which  causes  or 

gives  rise  to  it. 
de  guis  do'a  wph,  it  is  pressed,  it  is  printed. 
Dj'syo  wa,  Buffilo.     Do'syowa  Ganok'dayah,  BufJalo  Re- 
servation.   Do'syo  wa  Gah  han'deh,  BufTao  Creek, 
dyudok',  less;  dyudok'  heni'wah,  the  smaller, 
dft'sv/ayah'do  wet'hak,  you  will  judge,  decide,  determine,  take 

into  consideration,  (i  e.,  habitually,  or  from  time  to  time. 
d&  kni'khah'soh  sek,  the  two  will  divide  or  separate  it  or  tliem 

h.ibitually. 
de  ji'yali  do  ga,  between  you  two  persons.  '' 

disai' wall,  on  thy  account.  '■    ■  ^  «>   Iv 

>&h  sah'dok  gwa'ak,    thou  shalt  or  wilt  sweat,  thoii  shalt  cfr 

■wilt  be  in  a  perspiration.  "«' ■    *  ■       -  *- ^  ■  *< 


..vf.\'.      J' 


*si^asfei««'5%'&^^»«»«*i«te»iB^^ 


\aiKmmm 


if 


01 


>r 


<ia  $wah'daii  dih,  come  on,  come  forv/ord,  start  this  way,  conw 
along. 

d4  Ih'nya  4ii»  he  shall  or  will  take  cl)argo  of,  work  upon, 
tUl,  (the  ground  ) 

de  yu'di  sa  de'nyy'gwah  dgh,  it  turned,  it  changed  its  direction, 
it  kept  turning.  i  'i , 

d4shit',  tiiou  shalt  or  wilt  bruise  or  break  in  pieces. 

da*lBhedvva'ahsa  y  nyg'yk,  we  may  ormiglit  praise  him,  we 
ought  to  praise  him. 

dwgh  ni  gi/is  ah,  let  us  resolve,  let  us  make  up  our  minds  to 
do  so.  I  r  '>• 

dwah'ni  ^0  ah'geh,  inourmindii. 

deh  nva  di,  1  am  with  thee.  - 

dedyadi,  lam  with  thee. 

dah  nyadi  aak,  I  will  be  with  thee. 

d4  gy'yah  dah'gwah  dnh'go  ok,  1  will  take  thee  up,  hold  thee 
up,  bear  thee  up  with  it,  I  will  use  it  to  bear  thee  up. 

de  wah'denyvs,  it  is  changeable. 

dali  dc'wah'de  nyrs,  it  isuncliangeMble.        ,       •' 

de  dwa'di,   I.  am  with  you,  we  ure  together.        ' 

dejih'dowet,  do  thou  consider,  decide,  judge. 

dayu'doh  hoga  nya'bk,  it  will  be  wretched,  there  will  be 
misery. 

da'yah  do  weh  tliali'go  wa,  tlie  great  Judge. 

da  ja'do  g.'int,  you  two  shall  or  will  contend,  come  against  each 
other,  be  opposed  to  each  other 

d^li  gwa'eh,  quite,  very  ;  ;  used  to  denote  tiiat  the  property  or 
quality  spoken  of  exceeds  the  ex])ec  at  ions  ot"  the  speaker, 
"as: — dah  gwa'eh  wj  yu  it  i.s  better  than  thought;  dah- 
gwu'clr  ('sdeh',  ii  is  hcnvier  tlian  expected;  dah  gwa'- 
eh vve  ah,  it  is  quite  far,  much  fartlier  than  I  supp  ised  ; 
dah  gwa'eh  niyawah',  I  am  very  thankful,  (implying 
•  that  the  obligation  of  gratitude  is  now  perceived  to  be  much 
greater  than  had  been  anticipated.) 

Aigwah'hasd  s'syo  nili,  do  thou  make  us  strong,  impart 
strength  to  us. 

da  gwa'ye  na'wahs,  do  thou  help,  aid,  assist  us.  '    •'' 

cki^'sha.  nehs,  they  are  not  now  walking  ubout  or  goingaround^ 
(implying  that  they  iiave  been  heretofore,)      »  !3 :>^v. 


*i  I 


m 


n 


mnmmmrmm 


MM 


':^ 


LESSON   LX. 


u 


H 


:ii 


dah'de  je  ga'ueh,  she  does  not  bee  it,  does  not  look  at  it,  Dow  ; 

(implying  that  she  did  before.) 
d»  yO'gwa  nyio'da  gwah'dgh,  we  have  been  turned  out  of, 

or  have  changed  our  course ;  (spoken  of  ourselves.) 
de  yQ'gwa  d4  nont,  we  hope,  we  hope  lor. 
de  ya'oh'yak  hQh,  it  hits  the  mark,  it  conies  to  tl>c  point.     * 
da>agoh'nigo'ondgnyooh,    she  may  have  the  idea  in  her 

mind,  she  may  be  comforted,  consoled,  have  consolation, 
deli  sa'e  yQoh,  thou  art  not  dead, 
deh  o'nah  jih,  not  long  ago. 
dya  go'nyah  gw4h,  she  vomited  up,  siio  puked  up,  (spoken  of 

some  one  at  a  distance. ) 
de  yuh'nya  ge,  two  inches,  two  fingers. 
d*eh  o'jik  heh'da  gah'oh,  it  is  not  salt ;  it  is  not  tinctured  with 

salt;  fresh  ;  (applied  only  to  liquids. ) 
det  ho'di  ya'gah  oh,  they  came  out  from  again,  they  came  out 

from  where  they  had  gone  in. 
deh  wa'do  dyvs'thah,  it  does  not  produce  any  thing,  desert, 
deh  dwa'do  nyah'thah,  it  produces  nothing,  desert,  (spoken  of 

a  country  or  place  at  a  distance.) 
dwa  do'nyat  hah,  it  produces,  yields,  is  in  the  habit  of  produ- 
cing ;  (at  a  distance.) 
do'nyon.dah,  eagle, 
do'gas  Q  weh,  in  truth,  really  true,  positively  so,  absolutely 

certain. 
d4  want'wa  da  seh,  it  shall  or  will  surround,  go  round  about, 

encompass,  encircle,  (spoken  of  things  at  a  distance.) 
diswa'dadus'ha  ah,  you  shall,  or  will,  or  must  beware,  look 

out  for  yourselves,  be  cautious,  take  care, 
deh  sgas'oh  daat'ah,  not  one  hand. 

.de  o'yah  da'ga  hah,  not  innocent,  not  free  from  guilt,  not  ex- 
cusable, not  unimplicated. 
da  wan'do  gut,   it  shall  or  will  pass  through,  pierce  through, 

penetrate, 
de  tbo'dyah  dah'dgh,  he  came  down  again  from  thence. 
<i4'i  nan  dat,  they  will  meet,  (spoken  principally  of  pcrsoiui 

meeting  each  other  by  the  way. 


''■"t'i.»JK'i^>i»i»iiuiHWK«liMii'i  '■'*" 


rmmmimmM^q 


) 

ook 

ex- 

)ugb, 


da  ^/nQh  diin  dill,  they  «Uurt  or  started  to  come  from  theooo. 

da  yut'gl^h  o'an  dyleh,  it  was  increasing. 

dis  ho'wl  n^h'sa  gw4h,  he  spake  back  again  to  him,  he  ah- 

svirered  him. 
dy4  gwah'shg,  lest,  lest  perhaps,  if  it  should  be  so,  only  if  ic 

should  be  so. 
dant  chaali'thlh,  do  thou  come  up  again,  thou  shalt  or  wilt 

come  back  up  again,  climb  again,  ;iscencl  again. 
d4'an  di  yak',  they  will  break  through,  pass  by  the  mark, 
det  gQ'yali  dit'gl  oh,  I  brought  thee  out  again  from  the  plaao. 
do'sa  ga  y  a'on  duak,  it  may  or  might  be  like  it. 
d|h's|'nonyah'gah,  thou  wilt  or  shalt  bow  down, 
deh  a  go  yah'hih  Qh,  she  did  not  do  wrong,  did  not  err,  make 

a  mistake. 
de'ye  no'oh  gwa  nygoh,  she  swears,  takes  an  oath, 
de  she'yah  dah'gwah,    thou  shalt  take  her  away  from,  i.  c, 
from  her  companion,  thou  shalt  commit  adultery  with  her. 
d4  sa'di  wa'yan  doh'gwa  no'ok,  or  da  sa'di  wa'y an  dgh'gwaak, 
thou  shalt  report  concerning,  testify  against,  circulate 
stories  about, 
deji'nageh,  you  two  dwell  together, 
deyu'di  nah'gais,  ox,  a  creature  which  haa  two  long  slim  or 

"lender  horns. 
de  wan'nih  hwah'soh,  lightning,  flash  of  lightning,  ia  contra- 
distinction from  chain  lightning. 
da  gwat'ha  has,  do  thou  speak  to  us  or  preach  to  us. 
deh  swai'wa  neh'aas,  you  do  not  sin,  ore  not  in  the  habit  of 

sinning. 
doQ'sa  ya'gyadye'ak,  it  may  or  might  be  like  me. 
dasgwa'noo'nyQh  gwaak,  you  shall  or  will  thank  me,  wor- 
ship me,  praise  me,  i.  e,  continually,  habitually, 
dyu'hos  gwa  ont  shgh'Qh,  horned  cattle,  beeves,  animals  of  the 

cow  kind,  kine.  ^^ 

d^h  sek'  thou  shalt  or  wilt  take  up. 
dwah'sa'wah  gwah,    the  beginning,  the  commencement,  the 

origin. 
Dya'on  de  g|h,  Pittsburg,  Pa. 

de  ya'go  no'oh  gwa  nyoh,  sho  swore,  ihe  took  an  oath,  she  te»- , 
tified  under  oath. 


1  ' 


t 


i:, 


mi^^S^ssrssSBsmm 


.„  liliiiawf?^ 


m 


^: 


<-*- 


,■(». 


LESSON  LXL 


'» ,t 


A^; 


U&sno'oh  gwanyooh,  thou  shalt  or  wilt  swear,  take  an  ottb, 

or  lc:;tify  under  onth. 
do'o  non  dah'son  dai  gyli»  they  are  in  darkness.  ' 

de'o  di  gwe'nyy,  they  cnuld  not. 
deh  tho'di  gwn  nyoh,  agnin  they  could  not,  (implying  that  they 

I  ,vo  lulled  before,  urni  have  now  failed  again  also.) 
dohja'onis'hell  oh,  it  was  not  long  afterwards.  > 

de  veTs  do'4'"S.  she  is  a  printer,  slie  prints  or  presses.    '     . 
de h  j '  s  d IC.t'ah,  not  one  d»'op. 
dyawe'gaQh,  at  the  forks  or  junction  of  a  sma.    r  stream 

with  aiurgt^rone  ;  Cat  a  distance.) 
dya'wandadogah  do'nah,  at  or  on  tho  Sabbath  that  was  past. 

Oyah'  dya  wnndado'gah  do'nfih,  Sabbath  before  laftt,  a 

week  ago  last  Snbh.ith. 
de  yon'dii  ncynygh'gwah,  that  which  is  used  for  or  in  giving 

thanks  ;  that  for  or  on  account  of  which  tl  anks  are  given, 
dwatha'i  neh,  wo  are  travelling,  we  are  making  a  j.  urney. 
dwai'wa  ye  is,  let  us  do  the  thing,  let  us  be  faithful,  do  right, 
dwah  ni  go  is' so  ok,  let  us  ho  patient,  be  long  minded, 
dun  dwahs'nah,  .let  us  accomplish,  if  we  shall  succeed  in  ac- 

complisliing. 
dehswehs',  it  is  not  now  going  about  or  passing  along,  (im- 
plying that  it  was  before. ) 
da  wah'denyoguh,  it  will  be  changing, 
da  yus'no  wl  dyieh,  it  is  hastening  towards  us,  com:ng  swiftly. 
da'yagwadi'..k,  we  may  or  might  be  or  remain  together,  it 

may  or  might  remain  with  us ;  (of  ourselves. ) 
dwa  hus'deshwdah  goh,    our   strength,   the    source   of    our 

strength, 
dyu'hat  h's'dah  goh,  it  is  the  source  of  light, 
deh  sidi'dyijils,  you  are  not  afraid, 
daeja  do  gent,  you  two  may  meet  in  opposition  to  each  other, 

may  come  irito  conflict  with  each  other,  may  be  over  a- 

gainst  each  other, 
dessheswa'jih  sa  o  nyooh,  praise  ye  him.  -^  ' 

deh  eh'ses  ha'nia,  thou  dost  not  fear  him.  •  .    t^ 

ditn  dyiuh'syo  nent,  it  will  fail,  it  will  fail  again,  fall  short  of. 


^^^'TsmSmmmmm 


e^ 


our 


(14  she  dwa'fih  s4'o  nyoQh,  we  will  praise  him,  let  us  praise 

hin),  i.  e.,  in  future. 
de  gwa'ah  sa  o  nyo'neh,  we  are  going  on  with  the  business  of 

praising  thee,  we  are  now  engaged  in  the  act  of  prai- 
sing thoo. 
da  yuh'.sa  wa  jlytoh,  it  hogan  there  and  is  coming  this  way  ;  it 

IS  coming  on  from  stage  to  stage,  or  the  things  are  coming 

on  one  after  another, 
'dyude'qas,  it  burns,  it  is  combustible.  '  ' 

dyiuli  clai'yas,  it  is  hot,  it  is  ardent,    (i.  e.  it  is  in  the  habit  of 

being  so.) 
d4  ja'da  deh'swa'ah  sok,  you  two  shall  or  will  hate  one  another, 

(i:  e.,  habitually,  or  oonlinually.) 
dyus  ah'doh,  it  exerted  itself  to  the  utmost,  it  used  itself  up,  it 

did  all  that  could  be  done,  it  exliausted  itself,  it  is  all 

used  uj). 
dan  dyont  gah,  she  will  rise,  slio  will  stand  up,  she  will  rise 

again. 
deeh',    he  did  not  think,  he  had  not  the  purpose  or  intention, 
dyu  nan'deh  sivn  dob,  they  liave  their  nrst  there. 
dyu  nan'deh  san'do  nyob,  they  have  their  ncsfs  there. 
de'yo  gwa  dya'nih  dob,   we  strive  earnestly,  we  are  terrified, 

we  exert  ourselves  under  the  influence  of  fear. 
dyo  gwadeh'has  do  nyoh,   we  exert  ourselves  to  the  utmost, 

tin'.e  after  time, 
des  ho  di'wali  sagwab  seh,  he  has  forgiven  them, 
det  hot'ga  oh,  he  rose  again, 
dajo'gwakbah'sih,  it  will  separate  us,  if  will  make  a  division 

wnongst  us. 
deh.  gaat*gaali,  neither,  not  either. 
■  de  yo'gi  waib'd^ib,  she  opposes  or  hinders  me. 
deyu'diyati'hihdoh,     hindrance,  difliculty  ;,   it  hibders,   it 

obstructs.  ' '  J_. 

daa'gyali  dah'ni  go  h as,  he  does  not  forget  me.  w 

de  sho  gwais'do  a  gib,  he  prints  or  presses  for  us. 
doh'o  gwa  gwe'nyo,  we  are  not  able,  we  cannot. 
dell  6  uh  dooh,  it  will  not  exceed,  surpass,  go  by  or  beyond, 
deh  sga'wis  da  na  geh,  money  does  not  abound  now  ;  it  is  not 

plenty  now;  (implying  that  it  was  once.) 
9 


i  I 


!i 


-4    i\ 


|( 


M 


hi 


.  i 


<, 


LESSON  LXII, 

da'wa  dis'do  ak  sek,  they  may,  mighty  or  should,  be  printed  or 
pressed  successively,  in  order. 

da  gais'do  ak  sek,  it  may,  might,  or  fhould,  be  printed  or  pres- 
sed succcessively,  in  order. 

da'a  dis'do  aas,  the  printers,  they  who  press. 

de  a'di  wa'nande  nyos,  they  who  translate  or  interpret. 

de  o'nan  dya'no  nih,  they  do  not  do  the  fair  thing,  they  do  not ' 
do  their  best,  they  were  not  particular  enough,  did  not 
do  it  justice. 

dah'do'dikhahsooh,  they  do  not  divide  or  parcel  out. 

da'yok  hi'yah  do'weh  da'ni  ak,  they  may  or  might  not  give  us, 
bestow  upon  us  gratuitously,  take  our  case  into  consid- 
eration habitually. 

da'di  w&'nah.  sa'gwah  sek,  they  may  or  might  not  answer  or 
return  the  word,  or  prepare  the  copy,  or  make  the 
transcript. 

da'yc  dis'do  a'gd  on  dyieh,  it  will  be  printed  from  time  to  time, 
the  work  of  printing  or  pressing  will  be  going  on. 

da  wan'dis  do'ak  sek,  it  will  be  printed  or  pressed  in  order,  one 
after  another,  continually. 

da  wa  dis'do  aak,  it  may,  might,  could,  would,  or  should,  be 
printed  or  pressed.  '    • 

da  JO  gwai'wah  ja  dyieh,  we  will  be  pushing  the  business  for- 
ward, crowding  it  along. 

deh  o  di  wah'dan  dyo,  it  does  not  make  progress,  they  are  not 
gomg  on  with  it. 

deh  o'nah  jih'sho,  just  a  little  while  ago. 

de  yiuh'hat  he'nah,  it  was  light,  the  light  that  was.     * 

da  yon'jah'is,  t.  dayu'anjah'is,  it  will  jostll^Rie  earth,  it  will 
strike  against  the  earth,  it  will  come  in  collision  with  the 
earth. 

deh'^'wa  joh,  it  is  not  broken,  or,  it  was  not  broken,  or  in- 
jured, orspcnled. 

dah'deyudya'nyoh,  it  did  not  touch  them  ;  they  remain  un- 
touched. ^ 

dwah'dan  dyos,  it  proceeds  from,  it  is  in  the  habit  of  starting 
from,  (of  itself,  sponttineously.) 


M^ 


'.J. 


'^y-'X- 


'^mmmm 


,  «. 


""":;?/..■->-' 


dehtgayeih,  it  is  not  right,  it  is  not  perfect, 
deyuh'denyg'ondyiehs,  it  is  habitually  or  continually^  chan- 
ging- 
de  q'w$  yalL'do  wet  hak*  she  or  they  have  tried  him»  judged, 

him,  decided  upon  his  cause, 
de  ni'yvs  he,  two  men,  two  persons, 
dah'de  yu  di'o  gwah,   it  has  not  been  promulgated,  it  is  not 

spread  abroad, 
de  gais'do  a'go  nah,  it  was  printed, .  it  has  been  printed  or 
pressed. 

de  o'yah.  hih'oh,  he  did  not  err,  did  not  do  wrong,  did  not 
make  a  mistake. 

daya'Injondaat,  there  was  an  earthquake  there,  the  earth 
trembled  and  shook  there. 

de  jon'dek  hah'sQs  they  separate,  she  separates  again,  (applied  ' 
principally  to  the  parting  of  companions,  and  the  break- 
ing up  of  matrimonial  connexions.) 

da  ya'gya  do'gant,  we  two  will  be  opposed  to  each  other,  come 
against  each  other,  (spoken  of  ourselves.) 

de  yo'gwah  ni'gQ  an  dooli,  she  or  it  shall  cheer  us,  comfort  us, 
make  our  minds  easy. 

dwak  ngh'sot,  my  house,  (spoken  while  the  person  is  at  a  dis- 
tance from  it) 

dwak  nok'da  yah,  my  opportunity,  my  bed,  my  room,  my 
kingdom,  (spoken  at  a  distance  from  it.) 

da'wa  de'yah  hit,  it  may,  might,  could,  would,  or  should,  hin- 
der, prevent.) 

di  swai'waye'sdoh,    ye  who   are  perfect,  ye  righteous,  ye 
saints. 

da  swet,  come  ye  this  way. 

da  sah'ni  go  4  ge'aak,  thou  wilt  doubt. 

deh  swa'wah,  it  is  not  yours. 

dih  sahs'dan  daak,  thou  wilt  delay,  stand  still,  procrastinate, 
defer,  put  ofE  *  W 

de  eh'sa  ng'nyah  gah,  bow  or  stoop  low  before  him,  bow  unto 
him. 

dg'sa  ya  gwais'doaak,  we  print  or  press  it  (spoken  of  ourselves.) 

de  dyu  dis'do  a'go  nah,  it  was  printed  before. 

deah'isdo'aas,  he  who  is  in  the  habit  o7  printing  or  pressing. 


i 


inin-iMWlli.l     .UIIIlllMUm 


•"■;.■■■     '    ■,.''  '■■ 


'■(?;>■ -ir.- 


'^^1 


118 

LESSON  LXIIi.     -  ■       , 

de  gali'da  doh,  fort,  breast-work,  entrenchment. 

de  ga  ya'on  daah  goh,  parable,  comparison,  illustration.    -      ■ 

dayu'yagah'oandyieli,  it  is  coming  out  from  thence.   . 

do'dyah  da  hah,  it  is  girt  around  him. 

de  o'di  hat  heli,  they  are  enlightened,  they  are  civilized. 

deya'gohat'helidanih,  civilization,  she  is  habitually  enlight- 
ened. 

dah'de'yuh  ni'go  a  ge,  there  is  no  doubt,  there  aje  not  two 
.    minds,  or  o})inions.  . 

dyeli  ni'go  ayoiii,  regular,  right  minded. 

de  ga'os  ha  doll,  there  is  a  box  standing  around ;  (applied  some- 
times to  the  pulpit  in  a  meeting-house.) 

dyu  y  a'guh.  oli,  it  has  proceeded  or  come  forth  from  thence. 

deya,'go  hat  heh,  she  is  enliglitened,  civilized. 

da  yiu'i  \vi\s'yu  nyi'adyieli,  it  has  l)oen  coming  on  or  making 
progress  tliis  way,  in  accomplishing,  fixing,  arranging,  the 
Dusniei^s  or  matter  ;  it  has  been  producing  the  result  from 
tliat  time  forward  until  now. 

do  ga'liat  heli'da  nih,  that  which  enlig.iteiis  ;  civilizati-^n. 

de  yo  gwais'do  a  goh,  we  Iiave  prmtcd,  (spoken  of  ourselves.) 

dyo'gwah'saali.,  we  have  comnionced. 

de  yu'di  yah  jiih  da'no  on  dyies,  dilliculties  or  hindrances  were 
or  have  been  continually  in  the  way. 

de^o  i'wa  ycis'doh,  an  unrig! itcous  man.  ... 

drishoi'waiisagwirs,  he  will  ibrgive  him. 

dan  dwa'dye  ent,  it  will  be  first,  it  will  commence. 

deyiu'yah  do'wehdoh,  it  is  to  be  decided,  it  is  under  consider- 
ation. 

dawadyo'ont,  it  has  commenced.  ,    /. 

da'i  wa'it  hall,  ho  is  trying  to  break  or  destroy  it. 

dall  de  yo'wa'is  yoh,  the  vessels  were  not  wrecked. 

de  w||^l  ves  doh,  some,  a  few*,  -^  part ;  mixed  or  mingled  together 
with,  ,     . . 

dagai  onili,  it  was  on  account  of,  therefore  it  was. 

da  gali'hon  da'dyleh.,  along  the  creek  on  this  side  of  it. 

do'dih  gwah'  an  unknown  but  large  quantity  ;  how  many  ;  a 
grent  many ;  how  many  soever ;  ever  so  many,  or  much. 


t^-^"ii;iii»i"i  ISICinst-f -gji  mi,¥' 


■'wi^^*' 


'-..^^i^r^i^-^v'^l.- 


i-r-.p^/'i-^:. . 


■■Tt*r':riF'fl  ■;fV' 


«9 


de  yu'do  gwah,  it  is  scattered,  dispersed,  spread  abroad,  diffused. 

deh  gaiwa'niyatliok,  it  was  not  insured.        • 

deh  a'go  gwe  nyo,  she  cannot,  she  is  nc    able.     ''■"■'    '  '•       " 

da'yedat,  she  may  or  might  stand  up.  .  -i.  •■.   .i:. 

da'se'nyet,  do  thou  send.  '     '  .    '.  ^     • 

don  da  svvah  get,  return  ye. 

da  swah'si  ak,  do  you  be  standing  up. 

dwa'yaas,  we  call  it. 

da.  ye'ya  nis'hait,  she  will  break  the  law.  •  '  • 

deli  joli'ni  go'i  y  6t,  there  is  no  pleasure  now. 

de  dye'gah  saihs,  she  is  weeping,  her  tears  are  flowiiig. 

deli  sgah'has  dis'had,  there  is  no  strength  now. 

do'da  wa'nye  nah,  he  went  about. 

da  yu'i  wali'hct,  it  caused  it  to  be  so. 

da  gait'  it  will,  break  it  in  pieces. 

dao'nohdo'ondyieli,  he  is  controlling. 

deli  dvvan'noh  do'oh,  it  has  no  control  no  authority. 

deli  ji'dvvahas'dis  had,  we  have  no  strength  now.     . 

dwada'dat  gah,  let  us  give  ourselves  up. 

deh  she  gaah'seeh,  thou  hast  not  despised  them. 

des  he'yah  dah'gvvalc,  do  thou  take  her  up. 

de  yu  i  sgvvat,  it  is  slippery. 

deh  se'gahjih,  thou  art  not  old. 

dant  chat'heh  da'o  ek,  thou  wilt  be  gathered  to  the  dust,  covered 

with  earth, 
da  y  ali  nya  don'dyieh  sek,  he  will  be  preserving  or  taking  care 

of  thee.   ,  , 

dyon  da' deh  sa'doh  gwali,  the  grave.  - 

dp,  yo  gwah  sai'yali  da  nih,  it  hastens  us. 
da'she'dvva  dohs'ho  doos,  lot  us  kneel  before  him. 
de  a' gall  gwe  goh,  lie  is  blind, 
de  a'di  ga'no,  they  see. 
dethuh'senthwah,  he  cried,  called  aloud, 
daga'ondoh,  ask  thou  of  me.  \^ 

donda'gegah'gwaih'sih,  open  thou  mine  eyes,  again, 
de  a'di  gah'gwe  goh,  they  are  blind, 
deli  dwa'na  geh'o  weh,  we  do  not  permanently  dwell, 
d^.yc'g^vah  nyuh'syogh,  they  have  toi-n  it  from  us.     •   • 
dwa  nak'dih  saak  sek,  let  us  seek  a  dwelling-place.  . 


4\ 


m 


I 


19 


LESSON  LXIV. 


I«V 


Ul 


d|  JQ  gwaron  daky  let  us  have  fellowshipt  communion>  or  part- 
nership with  him. 

de  ye'i  wa'^  neh,  she  is  looking  at,  taking  notice  of. 

de  Q'ga  dyah'da  dgh,  my  disciples,  they  who  have  been  with 
'    me. 

dwat  ha'i  neh,  we  are  travelling. 

dwah'ni  go'a  has  dek,  let  us  be  of  a  strong  mind. 

dyont  gen'nisat'hah,  where  they  meet ;  (at  a  distance.) 

dent  khe'yak  dat,  I  will  bring  her  back,  cause  her  to  return. 

da  on'da  a  net,  that  they  may  come  back. 

da  gat'gat  huh,  look  thou  upon  me. 

da  gwat'gat  huh,  look  thou  upon  us. 

de  o  dyeet  hah,  they  do  not  awake,  it  does  not  awake  them. 

deh  ja'go  heh,  she  does  not  live  now. 

deh  sgwa  gah,  thou  dost  not  see  us. 

da'gwirs  da  ni'ak,  we  might  weep  for  thee. 

dehju'nakdeh,  it  is  not  painful  now. 

dah'de'yu  ha'gwen  das,  there  are  no  gaps,  vacancies ;  (imply- 
ing that  th^re  might  be  but  that  there  are  not.) 

de  yu'dyah  goh,  it  is  broken. 

de  gaih'dgh,  bruised  in  pieces,  cut  up  fine. 

daa'yah  son  dirk,  he  was  crucified. 

de  wa'do  guh,  let  it  be  promulgated. 

da  gi'ye  na  wahs,  do  thou  help  us  two. 

dyiut  haah,  it  sounds,  it  makes  a  noise  with  its  voice. 

deh  Q  gwa  deh'sah  hgh,  we  are  not  ready. 

deo'dinos'dadQh,  they  were  not  unwilling  to  part  with,  were 
not  covetous  of. 

de  e'ya'on  dgs  Qh,  I  did  not  ask  him. 

dwa  gis'ah  doh,    I  used  it  all,  1  took  it  all  away. 

det  ha'ga  wii,  he  gave  to  me  again. 

deh  sho'dQh  seh,  he  was  exhausted,  he  had  no  strength  left. 

da  e'yall  da'ges  g'.ih,  I  raised  him  up. 

dayus'goweh'doondyieh,  there  was  a  hurricane  coming  on 
this  way. 

dyctgwah'saih'syv^Qh,  the  blood  is  flowing  in  many  spots  or 
places. 


>"■*' 


:]--yC 


:  ■<¥■''•■ 


f    *■     v^  f  7.    '.  ■^'>   '  '?' 


on 
I  or 


n 

de  y  vk'hi  ga'nah  ji'w^h,  they  look  otosely  upon  us*  criticise  us. 
den  a'ga  dyah'sa  q  nygh,  I  hod  not  dressed  it,  or  boi^d  it  up, 

or  applied  healing  things  to  it,  i.  e.  in  many  places, 
de  dwa'ga  dgh  oh,  1  was  healed,  1  recovered  there  or  then, 
de  e'ah  si  o  nyoh,  I  praised  him,  1  honoured  him. 
deh  sgeh'hasdek,  I  had  no  more  strength  then, 
deh  sa'de  as'gwah,  thou  wast  not  or  hast  not  been  ashamed, 
da  go' want  has,  show  thou  tome, 
dak  ni  go  o'ni  aak,  teach  me. 
d4k  dat,  I  shall  or  will  stand  there, 
da,  gyah'da  wa'ent,  take  thou  me  over,  or  take  me  on  the  other 

side, 
don'de  dwat  gis'guh,   we  may  or  might  raise  our  heads  agaiuy 

(as  when  one  lying  down  rises  and  sits  up.) 
do'sayo'gwrs  nyieh,  it  may  take  care  or  charge  of  us  again* 
dyu  on'dah  Qh,  it  was  poured  upon, 
des  hg  wa'4h  sl'o  nygh,  they  praise  him  again, 
da  e'sah  g;vah'do  Qk,  do  thou  rais^  or  lift  it  up. 
di^sai'waye'sdoh,  thou  art  righteous,  thou  who  art  righteous^ 
da  ji'wa'ni  yaat,  do  thou  confirm  it. 
de  wa'gya  nis'haih'dQh,  I  had  broken  the  law. 
dee'gane,  I  see  him,  I  fix  my  eyes  upon  him.  ' 

de  ya'gwa'da'no  o  nyoh,  let  us  thank. 
daJQh',  do  thou  come  in.  ^ 

dasah'sent,  do  thou  send  down,  make  to  fali)  cause  to  come 

down, 
da  gwa  yohs,  come  to  us,  visit  us. 
dl'ng  heek,  they  two  shall  live. 

d|  Q  wa  yah'son  dvk,  where  they  hung  him  upon  the  cross, 
det  ha'yah  son  dvk,  where  he  hung  upon  the  cross, 
dg'sa  go'i  wah'sa  gwtrs,  I  forgive  thee, 
da  gi'Q  nyah,  do  thou  teach  me. 
da  gvs'haah'gwah;  do  thou  remind  mo. 
deh  kna'yeh,  let  me  not  be  proud, 
deh  geh'has  des'haad,  I  have  no  strength  in  me. 
dagQh,  give  thou  to  me. 

deh  sa  ga  y Ih'Qoh,  thou  art  not  willing,  dost  not  agri  e  to. 
dagwtrs'de  is,  do  thou  keep  us. 
de  e'ji  w&ih  dfth,  do  thou  destroythe  business  o;  matter. 


iiHa 


'^•2 


M 


m 

1': 


■    '    •   '   ■  t' -LESSON  LXV.  •    ■:■',•-" ^    •■<.   ■ 

•;  ■  .    .■    .••■.;.  •=^-^ 

dell  o'dofi'oiih,  he  was  unthankful,  discontented. 

do  o'gah  sa' nis  h^Ti'syoli,  ho  was  shedding  tears,  he  was  weep- 
ing. 

doh  sa  o  i'wali  sa  gwvs,  he  forg'ive  him  again. 

do  sa  e  i'wali  sfi  gvvirs,  I  forgive  him  again. 

dent  sgwiV  nnk  hell,  thou  uit  abuut  to  call  us  n  gain-    ''   - 

deli  o'gwah  sah'seh,  we  are  not  sorry. 

de  dwa'ye  naalj,  let  ns  take  hold  O'",  ■  '        "     ' . 

dejuh'denyo'ondyiell,  itischanginj^again.  ■ 

dishfji  Vvah'sa  gwx's,  ho  forgives  the  matter. 

d4  y'  :»aii  nya'dook,  it  will  keep  me,  protect  me, 

da'o  nn ; ,  <  ioliVia  dooli,  thej  will  stand  around  about. 

da.  t;gr:')t,  it  will  hcc^;  I:  it  up  ;i,«:ain,  It  will  be  broken  ii|i  again. 

dagoh'sa  o'nyo  o'.;,   I  n-ill  praise  it.  '  '  ■-   ■-. 

dwa  gyo'ya  gasolt.,  i  wiv  Uien  in  torment,  irt  misery ;  I  Was 
then  snin»ring  ('xtv'0.jfjel^N 

dwuhson'diJ.di^lr,  that  jX'st  nigiit  or  evening.  '  .    '•' 

de  o'?ion  do'«;2h  do'noji,  they  were  against  him,  they  were  op- 
posed to  liim."    '  ',     ■  .         ,    , 

deo'uh  invah'jiwah,  betook  bread,  *  '  ' 

deo'yahgol!,  he  broke  it  in  two.  '        ■  •    •■ 

diswai'vvah,  on  your  accoaiy;.  '  '  ■'       / 

daa'goyali'ny-idofi.,  may  he  protect  them. 

da  gat'hon  dek,  do  thou  hear  me,  listen  to  me. 

dasw-vh'denih,  it  shall  or  will  be  changed.  "  • 

desv.  "gadcyunjonih,  1  desire  now,  (implying  that  before  I 
did  not.)  .  ' 

de'anandah'no'ohgwali,  they  love  one  another.  ' 

dohi  gi.vn'ni  non'uok  hak,  I  did  not  'feel  it,  I  did  not  perceive, 
was  not  sensible  of  it.  ,  ,    '  • ', 

delia'goga,  (did  not  see.  '  ' .'  "     •'■    '' 

dah'd>Vv;i>]c  ni'go  a'ge  noli,  I  had  then  no  doubt.     '  ",.    '  '  "' 

dagyo'het,  do  thou  make  us  to  live,  save  us.  '      '"  '  ' 

deli  ak'hi  yan  de  is,  strangers,  they  whom  we  do  not  know.  ' 

deli  eli'ni  go  i  yu,  she  has  a  bad  disposition. 

de  bhe'ya  do  gwat,  scatter  them.  _  ^    '■'■■':■    '■■' 

dali  cha'noh  do'ok,  db  thou  controul,  rule  over. 


k- 


'•W       V  ''Sbt-  I 


^Jiii;^^*i»r.^Si^».fT'>^mJliS»mmir,-i, 


J' 4/ 


< 


:eiYe, 


ftv. 


73 

doh  jon'dat  ho'wat  liaTi.  she  does  not  ropont. 

dagyah  da  goe'wali'jih,  do  thou  thoroughly  cleanse  me. 

deh  ga'da  no' went  hali,  1  do  not  deny,  or  aisbolievc. 

dyohch'goh,  our  living,  that  by  which  i/e  live. 

dwa  gyo,  I  came,  I  have  come. 

dyo  gwa'yoh  dah'goli,  that  which  caused  us  to  como  in ;  we 

came  here  or  there  the  same  day. 
d'js'lie  ya  noh'do  os,  do  thou  control  her  or  them, 
dis  swa'di  o  gwat,  spread  ye  it  abroad,  c.  g.,  the  news,  scatter  ye. 
de  ju'hat  heh,  it  is  light  again. 

de  aTi'nya  do'on  dyiehs,  he  protects  it,  takes  care  of  it. 
da  geh.'has  dts'yo  nih,  give  me  strength,  make  mo  powerful, 
de  swa'gah  sa'ms  hah'syoli,  yc  weep,  shed  tears, 
deh  dwah'has  deli,  we  are  not  strong. 

de  ya'gus  gc'e  yoh,  she  is  weary,  she  is  tired, 
da  dvva'da  no'nyooh,  wo  will  give  thanks, 
dwah.  ni'gg  h  goh,  in  our  minds. 

da'wan  do  dali,  dawn  ;  daylight  is  coming. 

daa'gell  nyaali,  he  may  or  might  preserve  me,  take  care  or 
charge  of  mo,  he  may  be  discussing  my  case. 

de  o'yo  nah,  ho  had  not  come,  had  not  entered. 

da'a  nan  di'naTi,  they  were  together. 

dyo  gwetl'o  weh,  we  Indians,  (spoken  among  ourselves.) 

di  dwaat'gali'sho,  we  just  give  it  up  ;    (just  in  the  sense  of  on- 
ly, merely.) 

da'a.  non  dadeli'svva'ah  sek,  they  may  or  might  hate  themselves, 
or  each  other. 

da'a  non  da'da  de'at,  they  may  or  might  shame  themselves  or 
each  other. 

de  a  non  da'non  de,  they  are  brethren. 

deh  a'go  da'ni  da'oh,  she  is  not  kind,  merciful. 

da  gwah'ni  go'i  yus,  do  thou  make  us  happy. 

de  sno'nyo,  do  thou  thank. 

do  nagye,  whatshallldo? 

dayes'gaeh,  she  will  bewcviryor  tired. 

don  da'gwan  da,  pity  us. 

da  gyah'do  c  thnk,  I  ^vill  coii^i dor,  judge. 

dwa no'oh  gw"):.  that  which  v.^e  loved. 

dek  ni'  de  vv ^tiVnyah  eh,  two  hundred,  ''200.) 


r! 

J 


\\ 


( 


i 


'11 


I'if!^ 


1  1.1 
•  1  ' 


m' 


j 


t*       "s   ...u 


74 


hu 


de  yu'dyah  khoh,  it  is  broken. 

de  ya'guh  gwah'dg  ok,  let  her  take  it  up,  lift  it  up,  extol  it. 

de'Q  wa'an  sa'o  guh,  she  dishonours  him,  deprives  him  of  his 
honour  or  glory. 

de  yu'non  do'gah  doh,  the  two  things  come  against  each  other, 
are  opposite,  are  opposed  to  each  other. 

de  yu'dl  nQ'ya  nih'doh,  it  is  dreadful,  terrible. 

de'4  non  dah'ni  gQ'ah,  they  are  not  expecting,  not  looking 
out  for. 

dye  aas',  she  carries  it  along,  or  is  in  the  habit  of  carrying  it. 

deyiu'adeh,  valley. 

da  ja'dat',  you  two  will  meet. 

de  gawis'da  oh,  birch. 

da  yuh'dan  dyo'on  dyieh,  it  is  coming  this  way. 

deh  sho'gwah'ni  go'a  gat  hah,  he  does  not  guide,  direct,  or  in- 
cline our  minds. 

deh'sho  gwai'wis  ah'seeh,  he  did  not  promise  us,  or  he  did  not 
command  us ;  or,  he  did  not  make  a  covenant  with  us. 

de  ga'ah  sa  o  nyoh,  glories,  honours,  praises. 

dwa  gyah'da  di'ant  hwvs,  it  draws  me,  it  pulls  me  along. 

dwa  gyah'dit  gas,  it  casts  me  out,  it  turns  me  away. 

di  sa'ya  doh,  thou  didst  write  it  there,  or  from  thence. 

.dwa  gah'  saali,  I  began,  I  began  there. 


■ji 


■msatvs*) 


«»  '^     mi-i'..3itUUiCgSVt\ 


•Wf! 


mjfm/ftKrmmr-*  ^ 


75 


GRAMMATICAL,     VARIATIONS. 


LESSON  LXVI. 


Thus  far  the  words  have  been  inserted  as  they  occur  in  con- 
versation, without  regard  to  grammatical  classification. — 
Hence,  in  some  cases  we  meet  with  a  great  many  different 
forms  of  the  same  word,  whereas,  if  we  had  a  list  of  the  chan- 
ges through  which  the  words  pass  to  express  all  the  variations  of 
meaning,  it  would  have  been  sufficient  to  insert  the  root  only, 
or  at  most  those  forms  from  which  other  forms  or  sets  of  forms 
may  be  regarded  as  derived.  Such  lists  of  grammatical  chan- 
ges are  equally  important  to  the  Indian  learning  English,  and 
to  the  White  man  learning  Indian.  Some  of  them  will  there- 
fore now  be  given,  with  as  much  accuracy  as  can  be  attained 
under  existing  circumstances.  We  will  commence  with  the  va- 
riations of  words  used  as  the  names  of  things,  or  Nouns,  as  they 
are  called  in  English  Grammar. 

I.    Variations  in   Number. 


gwen  nis, 


penny  ;  (a  corruption  of  the  English  word  pence, 
or  pennies,  substituting  *  gw '  for  *  p, '  the  latter  not  be- 
ing found  in  Seneca,  and  the  people  in  ancient  times  not 
being  able  to  pronounce  it.  The  same  substitute  prevails 
at  the  present  day  among  the  older  Indians  in  their  efforts 
to  speak  English.) 

gwen  ms'shoh,  or  gwen  nis'shoh  oh,  pence. 

sga  gwen'nis  haad  or  sgagvven'nlshaut,  one  penny,  from 
'skat,' one,  and  'o  gwen' nis  htih,'  (obsolete),  the  matter  or 
material  of  the  penny.  [Analogy  would  require  us  to  write 
*sgat,'  one,  instead  of '  skat;'  or  else  to  say,  *ska  gwen'nis- 
hiiad'  instead  of  'sga  gwen'nis  haad' ;  but  'g '  and  'k ' 
are  often  interchanged  by  the  Indians,  and  so  also  are  '  d ' 
and  't,'  and  perhaps  a  lew  other  letters  :  andthcrcfoio 


I 


I 


'•'w3iB 


■^^^ggggjBSEBassBsm 


^   . JBk." 


"vy't'"^^''""  • 


76 


1  ■> 

n 


it  will  be  our  object  to  get  tho  pronunciation  in   most 
common  use  among  tho  people] 


do  ga'gwen  nis'hu  go, 
sail'  ni  ga'gwen  nis'liu  ge, 
ge  ill'  ni  ga'gwen  nis'liu  ?j>.) 


o  goos  iiiih. 

o  g6gs  huli  sholi, 

sgagooshaud, 

de  ga'goos  ha  go, 

sah  ni  ga'goos  huge, 


two  pennies, 
threo  pennies, 
iour  pennies,    (and  so  on 
for  all  higher  numbc  rs. ) 

the  pound  weight, 
pound  weights, 
one  ponnd- 

lUo  pUUllUS. 

three  pounds,  &c. 


day. 


days. 


vvanis'hali, 

wanis'halisiioh,  or,  wanishaliblif>h  oh, 

swiinis'liaad,  one  day. 

de  wa'nis  liu  ge,  two  days. 

sah  ni  wa'nis  ha  ge,  three  days,  &c 

Note. — The  *k'or  *g, '   in  'skat'  or  *sgat, '  seciiia 
to  be  dropped,  in  words  commencing  with  '  w.' 


o  oh'dall,  car. 

o  oh'daii  sliQh,  or  o  Qh'dali  sholi'oh, 
ju  oh'daad, 
do  yu'oh  da  ge, 
s4h  niyu'ghdage, 


ears. 


one  ear. 
two  ears, 
three  ears,  &c. 


oh'nyah, 

oh'nyah  shoh  (or — sho ' ; 'oh,) 

juoh  nyaat, 

de  oli'nya  ge, 

sah   ncyuh'nyage, 


finger, 
fingers, 
one  iin2:cr. 
two  fingers, 
thre    finders. 


Note. — It  appears  to  be  a  pretty  ^;'  '..ral  rule,  as  in  thr 
last  two  examples  to  begin  the  d''  .ibutne  singular  with 'j,' 
instead  of  'sk'  or  '.%'/  in  tl '  wo-  is  wnicJi  commence 
with  *  0.- 


I   I    / 


^4^^ 


•/  .''• 


17 

CjmpounJsof  *ga(Ioh' '  form  their  plural  by  adding  'nygll,' 
as, 


Vfii  ms'ha  deli, 
wa  nis'hu  de'nygli, 

0  non'da  deh, 
onon'dadc'nyoh, 


day, 
days. 

hill  or  mountain, 
hills  or  mountains. 


Perhaps,  however,  the  syllablo  *nyQ]i'  sould  be  regarded 
as  a  verbal  sulHx,  denoting  the  things  to  be  in  a  close  connex- 
ion with  each  other,  or  the  actions  to  \y'  repeated  in  close  succes- 
sion to  each  other,  as  it  is  joined  to  verbs  nearly  or  quite  as  fre- 
quently as  to  nouns.  Before  taking  on  this  suffix,  and  indeed 
any  oiher,  words  ending  in  'li,'  arc  softened  by  dropping  the  'h.' 


In  th" 

]h'j,' 
lence 


The  plural  of  things  iiaving  life,  or  capable  of  performing  ac- 
tions, is  often  formed  as  in  many  verbs,  by  prefix- 
♦adi,'  Miadi,'  'wadi,'  or  *nadi,'  to  the  noun; — 
though  perhaps  in  such  cases  there  is  a  change  in  the  na- 
ture of  tlio  noun,  so  that  it  partakes  of  the  nature  of  a 
verb,  as, 


go  s^d  nah, 

adi  go  vvanus, 
na  di  go  wa  na-*, 
ha  di  go  wa  n._ 
hahsano  wamlh, 


ha  dih'sa  no  wa  nas. 


something  great  (or  sim- 
ply, great.) 

great  ones,  chiefs. 

the  great  ones,  chiefs. 

thoy  are  great  ones,  chiefs. 

chief,  (i.  e.,  he  who  has  a 
great  name,  from 
*  gah'sa  nail, '  name, 
and  'go  vva'nah,'  great. 

they  are  chiefs,  they  kivo 


great  names. 


[The  '  s '  at  the  end,  is  also  a  sign  of  the  plural,  but  it 
is  frequently  used  in  v  rds  whicli  do  not  take  on  this 
prefix-] 


,1  I 

f: 

I 

if 

I 


» 


> 


■T^.^^fW^f^ 


78 


iiayah'chdeh, 
hudi'yahdadohi 


ho,  hinx 
they,  them. 


The  suftix  *shQh/  or  *shQh'gh,'  which  forms  the  indefinite 
or  unlimited  plural  is  frequently  applied  to  words  after  they 
have  taken  on  other  sutfixes,  as, 


os^ohdah, 
OS  oh'dah  geh, 
us  oh'dah  geh  shQh, 


hand, 

at  or  on  the  hand, 

at  or  on  the  hands. 


This  last  form  is  however  generally  spoken  *os  oh'- 
dah gis'hoh.' 


OS  oh'da  deh, 
OS  oh'du  de  ny  Qhj 


hand, 

hands,   (see  note  on  *  ga- 

deh,'  below.) 


Recapitulation  of  the  Variations  of  Number. 


hand, 

one    hand,    (Sometimes, 

though  rarely,   *  sgas- 

oh'doal.j 
two  hands, 
three  hands,  6:0. 


o  soh'dah, 
ju  soh'daat. 


de  yus'oh  da  ge, 
sah  ni  yus'oh  da  gc. 

Note . — *  y  *  i»  generally  inserted  before  all  words 
commencing  with  *  o,'  when  they  take  on  a  prefix,  and 
the  *  o '  is  generally  changed  into  *  u.' 

osoh'dah'shoh,  (oP — shoh  oh),  hands. 

OS  oh'dah  geh,  at  or  on  the  hand. 

OS  oh'dah  gis'hoh,  at  or  on  the  hands. 

OS  oh'da  deh,  the  hand  is  there. 

OS  oli'da  de  nygh,  the  hands  are  there. 

Note . — It  is  very  difiicult  to  define  in  English  the  pre- 
cise me.ming  of  '  ga  deh '  and  its  compounds.     The  true 


79 


inite 
they 


8  oh'- 

♦ga- 
ber. 

[times. 


Bgaa- 


words 
X,  and 


idea  can  only  be  acquirenl  by  use.  There  being  nothing 
in  tiio  notions  of  Wliite  people  exactly  corresponding  with 
it.  It  implies  the  idea  of  existence,  occupying  space  or  ex- 
tent, being  an  object  of  .sense  or  perception  ;  thus,  wo  say, 


o  yah'daJl, 
hix  yah' da  deh, 


Sgayent  hayah'dadeh, 


body. 

his  body  is  in  existence, 
(i.  e.  in  some  definite  place 
or  position.) 

it  will  strike  him,  (i.  e.  it 
will  strike  where  his  body 
is  occupying  space  ;  is  be- 
ing in  existence  m  a  per- 
ceptible object. 

It  is  said  to  be  more  properly  applied  to  things  which  stand 
out  in  relief,  as  it  were  ;  or  which  project  from,  or  stand 
up  upon  something,  as, 


gah&'yah, 
gah  an  deh, 


o  non'dah, 
o  non'da  deh« 


fence  or  fortification. 

the  fence  is  standing  up 

from  the  ground,  dec,  or 

rises  from  the  ground,  &c. 

hill  or  mountain. 

the  mountain  exists,  rising 

&c. 


But  it  does  not  appear  to  be  always  restricted  in  its  appli- 
cation to  conspicuous  objects,  though  perhaps  it  conveys 
the  idea  of  relative  prominence  when  applied  to  objects 
ever  so  minute. 


I 


M   i\ 


le  pre- 
iG  true 


*  nyoh  '  is  added  also  to  many  nouns  and  to  various  forms  of 
verbs  to  denote  the  idea  of  succession  in  order  one  after 
another,  and  might  with  propriety  be  termed  the  distribu- 


tive plural  suffix     Sometimes  for  euphony  the 
changed  into  *  h,'  as. 


IS 


w|  nis'hu  deh, 


dnv 


tmem 


nmsr 


■  !■  IIKMI   "irtwif 


4 

if 

i 

:3J 


U 


"  ■■■'  '■'>i'^j'**.  >  'i  j.^j^^ji'-'-V* 


'<j^"-»'   ■■  .i':"'    ■  1  '.' 


'^*' 


80 


w^nls'hiitlenyQli, 
gh  hah'syoh, 
oh  hah'syo  nyoh, 


(lays  in  succession. 

dawn  of  day. 

daily,  day  after  day,  (i.  c. 

dawn  after  dawn,  or  morn- 
ing after  morning. 


The  prefix  *  hah  de,'  is  also  used  as  a  sort  of  distributive,  but 
definitely  including  all  the  class  spoken  of  in  the  distribu- 
tion, as, 


liali'de  wa  nis'ha  go, 
hah'do  yo  gweh'da  ge, 


every  day,  i.  e.  all  the 
days,  one  by  one,  succes- 
sively. 

every  person,  i.  e.  all  the 
persons  one  by  one,  or  one 
after  another. 


But  in  order  to  have  this  effect,  it  seems  to  be  necessary  that  it 
should  be  prefixed  to  that  form  of  the  plural  which  ends  in 
*  ge,'  for  when  prefixed  to  words  ending  in  *  ah,'  it  signi- 
fies only  the  half  of  the  thing,  as. 


liah'de  wa  nts'ha  ah, 
hali'de  ga  wis'da  ah, 


lialf  a  day,  or  at  the  middle 

of  the  day. 

half  a  cup  full,  &c. 


Some  words  form  the  i>lural  by  adding  *  s '  or  *  lis '  to  the  singu- 
lar, as, 


wl  yu, 

ne  wiyulis, 

ho  gweli'di  yu, 

ha  ng'gweh  di'yuh  >, 

gowa'nah, 
go  wa'nas, 


good. 

the  good  things, 

he  is  a  good  man. 
they  arc  good  men: 

great, 
great  things. 


i^omotime':'  tlic  '  y '  is  iii'^crtc'l  bctAVCcn  the  parts  of  the  word,  in 


■■■-^mtSi^ 


i*f)wwwjTOf;'' ■■■'"-''  I 


81 


the  same  manner  as  the  parts  of  words  are  interfixed  where 
two  or  more  words  arc  compounded  together,  as, 


ni  wah'aah, 
ni  wahs'aah, 


little^ 
little  things. 


This  form  is  most  frequent  in  words  having  a  verbal  or  an  ad- 
jective signification,  or  in  ,vords  compounded  with  a  verb 
or  an  adjective,  and  seems  to  indicate  that  the  quality  or 
action  is  habitual,  or  at  least  frequently  repeated ;  but 
there  are  cases  where  the  object  seems  to  bo  simply  to  de- 
note tlie  plural  number. 

From  what  has  been  said  it  appears  that,  in  Seneca  there  are 
three  numbers  :  1st,  singular  ;  2d,  dual ;  8d,  plural ;  and  that 
the  forms  of  these  vary  as  they  are  regarded  distributively, 
successively,  or  collectively.  In  tlic  sequel  it  will  appear  that 
some  of  these  forms  admit  of  changes  to  indicate  past,  remote 
past,  prcser"it,  future,  and  remote  future  time,  but  as  all  these 
changes  have  a  sort  of  verbal  idea  about  them,  they  will  be 
omitted  till  we  come  to  spcnk  of  Verbs. 


a  1 


II.    Variations    in    Gender. 

Thero  are  five  genders  in  Seneca.  1st,  Ma^iculino  ;   2tl,  Femi- 
nine ;  3d,  Common  ;  4th,  Neuter ;  5th,  Animal. 

The  Masculine  and  Feminine,  are  similar  in  import  to  the 
same  genders  in  other  languages,  and  always  strictly  confined 
to  the  male  and  female  of  the  human  family. 

The  Common  gender  is  used  when  a  promiscuous  multitude, 
or  those  whose  sex  is  not  known,  arc  spoken  of,  and  its  form  is 
always  feminine  ;  hence,  the  Feminine  is  said  to  be  the  ruling 
gender  in  Seneca,  as  the  Masculine  is  in  English. 

The  Neuter  gender  is  applied  to  those  things  and  those  only, 
which  arc  destitute  of  animal  life. 
U 


!  !    J 


1  i 


I' 


'  '  -W 


..-.>w*,.™,.^-«.»r^-:Ji 


I'iuita- 


ill 


m  t 


82 

The  Animal  gender  is  confined  to  living  beings  not  belong- 
ing to  the  human  family.  A  few  words  appear  to  have  both 
Masculine  and  Feminine  forms  for  this  gender,  but  ordinarily 
the  sex,  when  distinguished,  is  denoted  by  the  addition  of  some 
v/ord  for  that  purpose.  The  younger  Indianj',  whose  language 
has  been  modified  by  their  intercourse  with  the  Whites,  not  un- 
frequently  apply  the  same  forms  which  denote  the  male  and  fe- 
male of  the  human  species,  to  animals,  but  the  older  Indians 
regard  this  as  a  corruption  of  their  language. 

The  genders  are  all  formed  by  prefixes  placed  immediately  be- 
fore the  simplest  form  of  the  noun.      If  other  pre  fixes, 
those  denoting  number,  are  used  before  the  same 


e-g-, 


word,  they  must  not  be  suffered  to  come  in  and  crowd  those 
denoting  gender  out  of  their  places,  but  must  content  them- 
selves with  being  prefixed  to  them. 

Examples. 

O'gweh,     human  being,  person  ;  (applied  also  to  the  beings  of 

other  worlds.) 
ho'gweh,     he  is  a  man. 
ya  go'gweh,     she  is  a  woman. 

ha  ji'noh,     he  is  a  man,  he  is  manlike. 

yeji'noh,    she  is  a  man,  i.  e.,  a  masculine  woman ;  but  in 

composition  with  other  words,  *  ye  ji'noh'  often  denotes 

simply  the  sex  without  regard  to  tlie  character  of  mascu- 

lineness. 
ye'oh,     woman,  she  is  a  woman  ;  (probably  a  contraction  of 

*  ye  ji'noh.') 
ga  ji'noh,  male  animal ;  (applied  to  beast,  bird,  fisli,  insect,  of 

every  description. ) 
ge'oli,     female  animal,  of  whatever  sort. 

de  i'ji  noh,     two  males. 

dc  gi'ji  noh,     two  masculine  women. 

ha  di'ji  nah,     three  or  more  men. 


^■•"wft  ^^-Hit ' 


:\~* 


83 

wa  di  ji  noh,     three  or  more  masculine  \vomen. 

Note . — The  *  h '  at  the  commencement  of  all  wordn 
of  this  description,  seems  to  have  somewhat  of  a  verbal 
force,  in  addition  to  denoting  gender;  and  * a'di ji'noh,' 
and  'na'dijinoh,'  may  perhaps  be  regarded  as  referring 
to  the  sex  while  'hadi'jingh, '  rather  declares  that  the 
men  are  manly  in  their  conduct  or  character ;  literally 
they  are    men,    with  such  an  emphasis  on   the  word 

*  men '  as  will  contrast  it  with  the  absence  of  manly 
qualities;  or  it  strongly  allirms  the  sex  where  it  had  been 
supposed  to  be  the  other. 

wa  di'ji  noh,  is  sometimes  applied  to  animals.  Indeed  the 
Feminine  and  Animal  genders  are  very  frequently  the 
same,  especially  in  the  plural  number. 

sha  yah'daad,     one  man. 

je  yah'daad,     one  woman. 

sga  yall'daad,     one  animal ;    from  *  o  yahi'dali,'    body,  and 

*  skat,' one.  But  the  vowel  in  the  lirst  syllable  of  the 
masculine  and  animal  forms,  is  very  often  pronounced 
as  if  written  *shai,'  or  '-egai.' 

de  i'yr's  he,  or  do  ni'yL^s  he,     two  men. 

de  gi'yus  ho,     two  women. 

de  gai'yirs  he,     two  animals.     But  '  dc  gi'y vs  he '  is  not  un- 

frequently  applied  to  animals,  especially  by  the  younger 

Indians. 

ni  wali'aah,     little  thing. 

iii  yali'aah,     little  boy,  (or  man.) 

niya'gak  uah,     little  girl. 

ni  a'gali  luih,     little  creature. 

ni  wirs'aaii,     little  things. 

ni  a'nahs  aah,     little  folks,  (masculine.) 

ni  wa'nahs  aali,     liltld  folks,  (feminine  and  animal.) 

hak  sali'aah,     male  cliiid,  boy. 


!'• 


I 

i 


\f 


f 


Ij 


I 


i-:^ksl^ 


tarnKSsmwrioM- 


@4 


l'< 


lii 


■V 


n 


ylk  sah'aah,     ft'irl, 

de  ilc'eali  aali ,     t wo  boys. 

de  gtk'saJl  luili    two  girls. 

hadik'sah  slioh'gli,     boys,  (more  Ihaii  two.) 

wudik'satishoh'oh,     girls,  (more  than  two.) 

But  mnsculino  dual  and  [)lural  are  applied  also  where  a 
part  of  tliose  included  arc  I'ennlcs,  and  even  in  cases 
where  but  a  yinglc  individual  is  a  male. 

ot  wirs'aah,     one  little  one  ;  fapplied  to  the  young  of  animals.) 
o  dit'was  b;hQli.'oh,     little  ones,  (^ three  or  more.) 

It  lias  been  remarked  tliatsomo  words  commencing  villi  *o' 
form  the  distributive  singular  Ijy  prefixing  *j'  instead 
of  *  sg,'  and  sullixing  '  d '  or  *•  t ;'  as, 

oline'yaTi,     bone. 
juli  ne'yaat,     one  bono. 

Perhaps  this  should  be  regarded  as  a  solitary  Instance  in  Se» 
neca,  of  what  is  so  common  in  many  langu:iges,  the  applica- 
tion of  the  feminine  gender  to  tilings  which,  pliilosophically  ic- 
garded,  should  be  called  neuter. 

III.     Variations    of    Person. 

These,  in  Seneca,  are  all  accomplished  by  prefixes,  for  the 
purpose  of  distinguisliing  the  person  speaking,  the  per- 
son addressed,  and  the  pcj'son  spoken  of ;  as, 

o'gweh,     tn.m,  person,  being. 

go'gweh,     I  am  a  man,  person,  &c, ;  or  perhaps  belter,  I,  who 

am  a  man,  &c. 
so'gwoli,     thou  man,  &c. 
ho'gweh,  he,  the  man,  or  he  is  a  man,  &c. 
ya  gf/gweh,     she,  the  person,  tlie  woman,  &c. 
deh'lmo'gweh,     we  two  persons  ;  (speaking  together) 
de yak'no gweh,     we  two  pertons,  (speaking to  another.) 


..:^ii.-C^aft^s^a^ 


8fl 


I-    ?-. 


dcs'iio  gwoh,     you  cwo  persons. 
(Jce'iio  gweh,     they  two  persons,  (masculine.) 
do'kno  gwoh,     they  two  jjcrsons,    (ibminine.) 
(Jyfj'gweh,  wc  persons,  (more  than  two,  speaking  (ogotiier.) 
a  gyo'gweh,     wc  persons,  (speaking  to  another.) 
jo'gweh,     3^011  people,  or  jK^rsoMs. 

ua'no  gwoh,  or  lia  no  gwoh,    tiioy  people,  or  persons  j   mas- 
culine, 
wa'no  gweh,     tliey  people,  oi"  per  ons ;  feminino. 


So  alsc  hi  compound  word^j ;  us, 


O'gweh,     person. 

Qgwcli'dali,  i)erson,  regarded  as  substance,  or  matter  ;  tho 
material,  so  to  speak,  oi'  personal  oxistcnco  ;  and  appli- 
cable to  character,  wiicn  comi)oanded  with  word:i  do- 


noting  character. 


'•  wi'yu',' 


Ogwcli'diyu,     good  person;  ('ogweli'dall, '  and 
good. ) 

go  gwoli'di  yu,     I  am  a  good  person. 

so  gwch'di  yu,     thou  art  a  <>-ood  person. 

ho  gweli'di  yu,  he  is  a  good  person. 

ya  go'gwcli  di  yu,     she  is  a  good  person. 

deh  hno'gwoli  di  yu,  ■',\'C  two  are^good  persons  ;  (speaking  to- 
gether.) 

de  yak'no'gwch  di  yu,  we  two  are  good  persons  ;  (speaking 
to  others.) 

des  sno'gweli  di  yi:,  you  two  arc  good  ])ersons. 

dee  no'gweh  di  yu,     they  two  arc  good  men. 

dc  kno'gweli  di  yu,     they  two  arc  good  \vomen. 

dji'o  gwoli'di  yu,  wc  are  good  people  ;  (sjjeaking  together. 
Jkit  tin's  form  is  nearly  o!)soletc,  the  I'ollowing  word  be- 
ing substituted  in  its  place.) 

a  gyo'gweh  di  yu,  we  .arc  good  people,  (speaking  to  others,  and 
ol'ten,  also,  used  instead  of  the  preceding  word.) 

jo  gwcTi'di  yu,     you  are  good  people. 

na'iio'orwclKhvu,     and  JiaTinD'oweli  di  yu,     thev  are 
people  ;  masculine. 

wanc/gweluliyu,     Ihey  are  good  people  ;  feminine.  • 


good 


'. 


m 


If 


I 


r'  '■<£ 


''.-t^jSSRE&SS 


■.-jjir- 


''-T".V" 


E  i  L. 


86 

111  translating  Indian  into  English  the  verb  may  be  omit- 
ted in  all  these  cases,  if  the  construction  of  the  English 
demands  it. 

IV.    Variations    of  Nouns   to    express    the 
idea  of  Property    or    Possession. 

Os  oh'dah,     hand. 

gls  oh'dah,     my  hand. 

sis  oh'dah,     thy  hand. 

has  oh'dah,     his  hand. 

yes  oh'daTi,     her  hand. 

gus  oh'daJi,  her  hand  5  (more  definite  than  the  preceding  word, 

generally  referring  to  some  particular  i)erson  who  is 

the  subject  of  the  conversation.) 
gas  oli'dali,     its  hand. 

fJ>asoh'dali.,     our  hand;  dual;  (speaking  together.) 
s.  gyes'oh  dali,  our  hand  ;  dual ;  (speaking  to  another.) 
jas  oh'dah,     your  hand,  dual  ; 
yas'ot;  dah,     their  hand  ;  dual  masculine, 
wa  es'oh  dah,     their  hand  ;  dual  feminine, 
dwas  oil' dah,     our  hand ;  plural ;  (s])eaking  together.) 
Cgwas'ohdah,     our  hand  ;  plural;  (speaking  to  others.) 
swas  oh'dah,     your  hand  ;  plural. 
ha  dis'oh  dah,     their  hand  ;  plural  masculine, 
wa  dis'oh  dali,     their  hand  ;  ph  .ral  feminine  or  animal. 
o  dis'oh  dah,     their  hand ;  animal. 

The  same  forms  ai'e  used  for  the  personal  possessive  distinctions 
when  suffixes  are  added  for  any  purpose,  or  the  word 
joined  in  composition  with  other  words  ;  as, 

gts  oh'dah  geh,     at  or  on  my  hand, 
sis  oh'dah  geh,     at  or  on  thy  hand,  die. 

gls  oh'da  deh,     my  hand  appears, 
sisoh'da  deh,     thy  hand  appears,  eVc. 

gis  olKkih  shoh,  (or— 'siioh'oh,*;     my  hands. 


■■"V- 


Z'C 


8T 


SIS  oh' dall  shoh,  &;c.,     tliy  hands,  &c. 

g1s  oh'di  yu,     my  good  hand, 
SIS  oh'di. yu,    -thy  good  liand,  &c. 

"Words  which  end  in  *  aah '  change  it  into  *  uali '  in  the  first 
person  singular,  possessive  ;  as, 

gah'hi  gwaali,     caporhai 
agih'hi  gwaah,     my  cap  or  hat." 
sah'hi  gwaah,     thy  cap  or  hat,  &;c. 

gah'syi  gwaall,     spear  or  fork;   any  instrument  having  tines, 
a  gih'syi  gwaali,     my  spear, 
sah'syi  gvvaall,     thy  spear,  &c. 

hah'nih,     my  father  ;  (speaking  of  him.) 
halinii',     myfatiier;  (speaking  to  him.) 
gQh'nih,     I  am  thy  father  ;  or,  I,  thy  father ;  (but  this  word 
is  used  by  some  in  directly  the  opposite  sense  ;  as,  thou, 
my  father.) 
yah'nih,    thy  father, 
hoti'nih,     his  or  her  father. 
oh'nih,     its  father. 

shedili'nih,     our  father;  dual;  (speaking  together.) 
shagih'nih,     our  father ;  dual;    (spoakidg  to  others.) 
she  jih'nih,     your  father ;  dual, 
no  wafi'nih,     their  father  ;  both  dual  and  plural, 
she dwah'nih,     our    father;    plural;    (speaking  among  our- 
selves.) 
sha'gwah'nih,     our  father;  (speaking  to  others.) 

gvvah  niih',     our  father  ;  (speaking  to  him.) 

she  svvah'nih,     your  father. 

godiJi'nili,     their  father;  feminine;  (i.  c.,  they  females. ) 

sha  go'dih  nib,     his  fathers,  or  he,  their  father. 

ho  wan'dih  nih,     their  father. 

ho  dih'nih,     their  father. 

o  dih'nih,  their  father  ;  animal,  dual,  and  plural. 

ak  hih'nih,     our  fathers ;  plural. 


,» 


:  :£ 


^f 


I  «1 


ij 
is 

ii 


* 


Hi 


86 

o  thiTi'nfh,     our  fathers ;  dual, 
echill'nih*     your  Ihtlicrs  ;  plural, 
gahiils'huri,     fathorship,  the  parental  relufion. 
on  da'dcli  nih,  lather. 

ho'awalc,     my  son  ;  (Rpoaklnp;or  liim.) 

ke'awak,     iny  dauglitor  ;  ( speaking ol' her.) 

go'uwnk,  my  son,  my  cliiki ;  cither  male  or  female.  Some- 
times  also,  Mic'awak','  and 'kc'a  wnk','  with  theuc- 
cx-nt  on  the  la^tsyllidjle,  (us  is  usual  in  addressing  any 
one,)  are  addressed  to,tlie  son  or  daughter;  but  this  is 
l)ad  Seneca. 

Jicli'sha a  wak,     thy  son. 

yhc'a  wak,     thy  dauditer. 

ya  a  wak,     thou  art  his  son. 

no'a  wak,    his  son. 

shago'awak,  his  daughter. 

no  wn'wnk,     her  son. 

go'a  wak,   her  daughter. 

o'a  wak,     its  son  or  daufrhicr. 

1  T'  1 

she  (li  a  wak,     our  son  ;  durd  ;  (speaking  among  ourselves.) 
sagi'awak,     our  son;  dual:  (speaking  toothers.) 
sheji'awakj     your  son;  dual, 
ak  ilia  wak,    op.r  daughter ;   dual,  and   ^dural  ;  (speaking  of 

lar  to  others.) 
gl'awak,     ou.  son  or  dnugliter  ;  dual  vocative, 
cthi'awak,     our  daujrl iter  :  dual  and  idural  ;  (speakin£rton:c- 

therol  licr. ) 
o  chi'a  wak,     your  daughter ;  dual. 
she  dwa'a  wcdv,     our  son  ;  j)lur.il ;  ("speaking  together.) 
sha  gvva'a  wak,     our  son  ;  (speaking  to  others.) 
shcswa'awak,     your  son;  plural, 
godi'awak,     their  daughter ;  feminine, 
shago'diawak,  tlieir  daughter  ;  masculine,  dual,  and  plural. 
ho  wan'di  a  wak,     her  suns. 
yon  dat'ha  wak,  or,  nond;>t;ha  wak,     daughter. 
yadat'hawakv     father  and  son,  or  fathci'  and  daughter,   or, 

mother  and  son  ;  (spolaui  of  togctlier.) 
gyadal'hu  \^ak,    mother  and  daughter )  (spoken  of  together.) 


.'■I 


of 


)0'C- 


ral. 


jadat'ha  wak,     your  daughter  or  son  ;  dual.  '   <> 

ak  hi'a  v/ak,    sho  is  our  mother  ;  (i.  e.,  we,  (dual  and  plural,)' 
are  her  children ;  speaking  to  othe*-"  ;,  'A 

The  preceding  forms  are  i.j-  1  in  the  common  intercourse  of 
life,  hut  the  p. oral  of  '  yon  dai )  :i  wak,'  is  seldom  used  except 
in  the  sittings  of  the  Six  Nations'  Council ;  as,  '     • 

dwadat'hawak,     our  son  or  daughter;  (speaking  together.) 

a  gwa'dat  ha  wak,     our  son  or  daugiitor  ;  (speaking  to  others.) 

swa  dat'lia  wak,     your  son  or  daughter. 

ha  non'dat  ha  wak,  their  son  or  daughter;  hut  all  denoting 
the  relationship  existing  hetween  the  different  tribes  of 
the  confederacy^  Probably,  however,  in  ancient  times, 
the  woi'ds  wore  in  common  use  as  applied  to  the  domes- 
tic relations,  in  the  same  manner  as  the  other  forms  aro 
at  the  present  day. 

noh'yah,     my  mother,  (speaking  of  her.) 
noh  yali',     my  mother,  (speaking  to  her.) 
ea  noli'ah,     thy  mother. 
ho  nofi'ah,     his  mother, 
gonofi'ali,     her  mother, 
onoh'ah,     its  mother. 

ethi'noliah,     our,  (dual  and  plural,)  mother  ;  (together.) 
nk  hi'noli  ah,     our,  (dual  and  plural,)  mother ;  ,'of  her.) 
khinoliTiTi',  our,  (dual  and  piural,)  mother;  S|  ..^king  toher. 
Qk  hi'noli'ah,  she  is  our  daughter  ;  i.  e.,we,  (dual  and  plural,) 

are  her  mothers;  (speaking  toothers.) 
e  chi'noh'ah,     your,  (dual  and  plural,)  mother, 
sha'go  di'noh'ah,  their,  (masculine,  dual  and  plural,)  mother, 
go  di' noli  ah,     their,  (feminine,  dual  and  plural,)  mother, 
yon  dah'noll  ah,     mother,  or  mothcrship. 
aknoh'ahshoTi,     my  mothers, 
sanoli'ah'sholi,     thy  mothers, 
ho  noli'ah  sh  oh,     his  mothers;  &c. 

heh'gah,     mv  vounger  brother,  (speaking  of  him.) 

13 


M  ' 


It 


'I  ' 
'I  i 


ni' 


^it^ 


90 

h^hg^h',     my  younger  brother,  (speakin||' to  him.) 

keh'gilh,     my  younger  sister,  (speaking ot  her.) 

keh  gah',     my  younger  "''~tor  ;  (speaking  to  her.) 

seh'g^h,     thy  younger  sister. 

he'seh  gah,     thy  younger  brother. 

hoh'gah,     his  younger  brother. 

ho  wah'gah,     her,  (and,  not  unfrequently,  their,  dual  and 

plural,)  younger  brother, 
shagoh'gah,     his  younger  sister, 
she  dih'gafi,  our,  (dual,)  younger  brother  ;  (speaking  together 

of  him.) 
sliagih'gah,     our,  (dual,)  younger    brother;    (speaking  to 

others.) 
ethih'gdh,    our,  (dual  and  plural,)  younger  sister;  (speaking 

together  of  her.) 
a  khih'gali,   our,  (dual  and  plural,)  younger  sister  ;  (speaking 

to  others.) 
khih  gah',  our,  (dual  and  plural,)  younger  sister;  (speaking 

to  her.) 
ok  hih'gah,  our,  (dual  and  plural,)  older  sister  ;  (i.  e.,  we  are 

her  younger  sisters  ;  speaking  to  others.] 
.shejih'gah,     your,  (dual,)  younger  brother, 
gih'gah',  our,  (duai,or!d  vocative,)  younger  brother  and  sister, 
goh'gah,     her  ynuni'.or  sister, 
echih'gah,     yov    dud  and  plural,)  younger  sister. 
ho  wan'dih  ^rjh,     tiieir,  (dual  and  plural,)  younger  brother, 
she  d^vah'gah,     our,  'plural,)  younger  brother  ;  (speaking  to- 
gether of  iiim.) 
shagwah'gah,     our,  (plural,)  younger  brother  ;  (speaking  to 

others  of  him.) 
sheswah'gah,     your,  (plural,)  younger  brother. 
yon  deh'gah,     brother  or  sister. 
yon  da'deh  gah,     the  relationship  of  the  younger  brother  or 

sister. 
«;y  a  (deh'gah,     they  two  younger  sisters, 
ya  deh'gah,     they  two  younger  brothers, 
ja  deh'gah,     you  two  younger  brothers  or  sisters. 
swa  deh'gijh,     you  younger  brothers  or  sisters  ;  (plural.) 
oh'g44h,    its  younger  brother  or  sister. 


/•-  -< 


■ssMsmBssaaniiH^, 


h4  non'deh  g^a^i    they,  (plural,)  younger  brothers, 
wlncndehgaa^i     they,  (plural,)  younger  sisters. 

hah'jih,     my  older  br  )ther  ;  (speaking of  him.) 

ah'jih,    my  older  sister  ;  (vspeaking  ot  her.) 

hah  jiih',     my  older  brother ;  (speaking  to  him.) 

:ah  jiih',     my  older  sister ;  Tspoaking  to  her. ) 

yah'jih,     thy  older  brother. 

sah'jih,     thy  older  sister. 

hoh'jih,     his  older  brother. 

sha  goh'jih,     his  older  sister. 

oh  jin,    her  or  its  older  brother  or  sister. 

shedih'jih,      our,  (dual,)  older  brother  ;  (^  together.) 

shagihjili,     our,  (dual,)  older  brother,  (speal  >  others.) 

gihjiih.',     our,  (dual,)  older  brother,  or  sister;  (speaking  to 

hiraor  her.) 
shejih'jili,    your,  (dual,)  older  brother.  [together, 

ethih'jili,     our,   (dual  and  plural,)   older  sister ;   (speaking 
ak  hih'jih,     our,  (dual, )  older  sister ;  (speaking  to  others.) 
Qkhih'jih,     she  is  our  younger  sister ;  [i.  e.,  we  are  her  older 

sisters, — dual  and  plur., — speaking  to  others, 
echih'jih,     your,  (dual,)  older  sister. 

ho  wah'jih,     their,  (dual  and  plural,  teminine,)  older  brother. 
ho  wan'dih  jih,     her  older  brothers. 

she  dwah'jill,  our,(plural,)  older  brother;  (speaking  together.) 
sha  gwah'jili,  our,(pIural,)  elder  brother  ;  (speaking  to  others, 
shesvvah'jih,     your,  (plural,)  elder  brother. 
sha  go'dih  jih,     his  older  sisters. 
yon  da'deh  jih,     the  relationship  of  the  older  brother, 
hahjih'shoh,     my  older  brothers, 
yahjih'shoh,     thy  older  brothers  ;  &c. 
ah  jih'shoh,     my  older  sisters. 
sahjih'shoh,     thy  older  sisters  ;  &c. 

haksut,     my  grandfather  ;  ["speaking of  him. 
hak  soot',     my  grandfather  ;  [speaking  to  him. 
yah  sot,     thy  grandfather. 
ak  sot,     my  grandmother  ;  [speaking  of  her. 
ak  sect',     n^y  grandmother ;  (speaking  to  her. 


f 


f 


ejT  i£iki»  A^fcaHTT.-r: 


'MMnI 


wi^m 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


l.i 


r 


^  m 

Sf  ms.  12.0 
lit 


M 


IL25  III  1.4 


^ 


'/] 


^l 


y^ 


^ 


Phofc^raphic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N,Y.  14S80 

(716)8712-4503 


■•^% 


o^ 


::^f:.'. 


■ws 


■*^; 


OS 


»ah  s6t,  thy  grandmother.  Js^w I  .j.  >  -v  > f I j 
hoh'sfit,  his  grandfather  or  mother,  ?♦ 
oh'86t,    her  or  its  grandfather  or  mother. 


.h!'^i-2  A'-\h  :un  i;J 


•  HniMj! 


:i'jtt  JiVf 


«he  dih's6t,  our^  (dual,)  grandfather  ;(speaking  together.),  ,- 
shagih's6t,  our,  (dual,)  grandfather ;  (speaking  to  others.)  ; 
gih  soot',  our,  (dual,)  grandfather ;  (speaking  to  him.)  .  ,{j- 
ho  dih'sot,  their,  (dual  and  plural,)  grandfather  or  motheiji ,... 
shejih'sot,     your,  (dual,)  grandfather.  ,' 

ethih'sot,  our,(dual  &  plu.,)  grandmother  ;(speaking together, 
ak  hih'sot,     our,  (dual  and  plural,)  grandmother  ;  (speaking 

toothers.) 
khih  soot',     our, — dual  and  pljir. — grandmother  ;  speaking 

to  her. 
ok  hih'sot,    our, — dual  and  plur. — grand-daughter ;  [i.  e.,  we 

are  her  grandmothers ; — speaking  of  her. 
€  chih'sot,     your,  (dual  and  plural,)   grandmother.,  .>. 

shedwah'sot,     our  grandfather  ;  (speaking  to  others.) 
shagwah'sot,  our,  (plural,)  grandfather  ;  (speaking  to  others,) 
gwahsoot',    our  grandfather  ;  [speaking  to  him.        \  ,^  y(y 
sheswah'sot,    your, — plural, — grandfather,      „-.;., 

'  '  .,  .'■'■  ^  ...  I'll':- '. 
hakn6h'sah,  my  uncle,,  ,.  ,  ., ,  :.■.,■  ,  "  !  ;,  ,  ,• 
yanoli'sah,     thy  uncle,  .  ,     ;      ■•!•         ;    '.  Vr  .   ..,' 

honoh'sah,     his  uncle.  ,  .  ,,       .  r  .    ,,!•'. 

onoh'sah,     her,  or  its  uncle. 

she  di'noh  sah,   our,  (dual,)  uncle  ;  (speaking  together.)    ., 
sha  gi'noh.  sah,    our,  (dual, )  uncle  ;  (speaking  to  others.)    > 
ginoh'sah',     our,  (dual,)  uncle  ;  (speaking  to  him.) 
she  ji'noti  sah,     your,  (dual,)  uncle.  ;  •■ :  r.^ 

she  dwa'noh  sah,     our,  (plural,)  uncle  ;  (speaking  together.) 
sha  gvva  noh  sah,     our,  (plural,)  uncle  ;  (speaking  to  others.) 
she  swa'noh  sah,     your,  (plural,)  uncle. 
howanciJisah,     their,  (fern.,  dual  and  plural,)  uncle. 

So  also,  for  the  most  part  are  declined  the  following  names  of 
relationship;  viz.,  ;     \        ,-  . 


a'ge  hak,    my  aunt,  my  father's  sister  j 


Vr"! 


hi 


■if  «l >»«.,*■,  ■ 


.■^;-s5 ,'::"'; 


a  gaah'seeh,  or,  a  gyaah'Seefi,    my  cousin  ; 

a  gya'dyioh,     my  brother  or  sister-in-law  ; 

a  gya'nyeh,     my, — fem. — sister-in-law. 

ke'nok,    my  relative ;  (applied;to  blood  rd^tions)     '-•  * 

ke  ya'deh,     my  grand-daughter ;  ,  >     ,    .  • 

a'gadaoh,     my  friend  ;         i/ioil  i 

ke  noh',     my  step-daughter  ; 

ke  sah',     my  daughter-in-law; 

ke  ya'o  wan  dah,     my  niece,  (i.  e.,  my  sister's  daughter) 

hak  noll'is,     my  step-father ;  .  . 

ak  ne'hoos,     my  father  or  mother-in-law;  , 

agah'nieh,     my  uncle's  wife.     .  i;  .  «'  < ;.  •.:'^ ')<; 

kna  wah'shah,     the  family,  or  household,  of  my  wife. 

But  words  which  commence  with  the  dual  prefix  *  de,'  take  on 
',     -  that  prefix  before  all  other  grammatical  changes  ;  as, 

, ^'  ;.;»,.  -.'i.ri 
de'ya  gya  da'non  de,     my   brother  or  sister,   without  respect 

to  age  ;  (speaking  of  him,  or  her.)  [or  her. 

de  dya'da  non  de,      my  brother  or  sister ;  [speaking  to  him 
de  ja'da  non  de,     thy  brother  or  sister.   '■  . ;  , ,     '    ( •  i .  v  ; :  >■  i 
de  ya'da  non  de,     his  brother  or  sister.    ...   .;  ;  • ;  ■,■,:■.'  j  : .'. ; 
de  gya'da  non  de,     her  sister. 

dedwa'danonde,     our  brothers  ;  (speaking  together.)    ■•  ; "' 
de  ya'gwa  da'non  de,     our  brothers  ;   (speaking  to  others.)  ■■'■ 
de  swa'da  non  de,     your  brother  or  brethren, 
de'a  non  da'non  de,     their  brethren. 
de  wa'non  da'non  de,     thqir  sisters ;  (applied  also  to  animals.) 

.  ■    Perhaps,  however,  the  better  way  to  interpret  these  words  is, 
•i    to  give  them  a  verbal  signification  in  all  cases  ;  as     •  ■ 


de  ya'gya  da'non  de,  we  two  are  brothers, 
de  ja'da  non  de,     you  two  are  brothers ;   &c. 


■if  I 
•■■J-' 

»■:■ 


lit 


Among  the  Indians,  all  the  father's  brothers  are  called  fa- 
thers, and  his  sisters,  aunts ;  all  the  mother's  sisters,  mothers, 
and  her  brothers,  uncles.  So  also,  with  grandfather's!,  and 
grandmother's  brothers  and  sisters.,  ;.',■.'' 


iii^fet. 


^tfnim*tmtitrviu.niiii»am-iMifn 


SEP 


tSSSSSi 


■■-A!' 


04 

LESSON    jLXVII. 


^:> 


it! 


OF  WORDS  USED  INSTEAD  OF  NOUNS, 
caU«d,    in  English    Grammary    ' 
PRONOUNS. 


.,■' 


I.    Personal    Pronouns.  ;:     ' 

Of  these  there  are  three,  in  Seneca,  with  their  variations. 

l.-ih,    I,  we.  fe,    thou,  ye,  or  you. 

This  pronoun  is  often  compounded  with  the  article  *  neh,^ 
and  is  then  written, 


nih,    I,  wo* 


nis,    thou,  ye. 


But  when  the  article  is  emphasized,  it  is  spoken  separately^ 
and  changed  into  *  nail ' ;  as, 

n|h  ih,    I,  or  we;       |     in  distinction  from,  or  contrast 
nih  is,    thjuorye;      |      with,  all  others. 

Perhaps  some  would  regard  the  *  ni  in  this  case,  as  ano' 
ther  form  of  *  na,'  marked  as  an  interjection  in  Lesson  IJ, 
on  the  10th  page,  and  there  translated  *look  here !  behold  ! 
see  this ! '  and  which  may  sometimes  properly  be  render- 
ed *  here  it  is,'  *  this  is  the  one,'  &c. ;  bit  we  have  other 
instances  of  *  neh '  changed  into  *  nah,'  simply,  as  it 
would  seem,  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  and  it  may  therefore 
be  proper,  in  the  present  state  of  our  knowledge  of  the  lan- 
guage, to  regard  it  so  here. 

^.-ha'o  hg-h',   or,    ha'ghw^h',    he,  him,  or  he  himself. 
ga'Qhall',    or,    ga'ohw^h',    she,  her,  she  herself.         * 
•'ohfth',    or,    a'Qhwfth',    it,  itself.  '      ' 


■iiiiBiau  '»^' 


,JBS*«W«"««««*'"' 


i*  ".;V^?v 


«& 


ho'nQ  h^h',    they,  them,  they  themselres. 
o'nohah',    they, themselves;  (animals.) 


i  f 


The  remaining  forms  of  this  word  appear  to  have  been  an- 
ciently in  use,  but  are  now  only  retained  in  composi- 
tion $  as, 

a  goh'hah  ge'ah,    I  alone. 
sQn  hah'ge  ah,    thou  alone, 
ha  Qh'han  ge'ah,    he  alone, 
ga  Qh'hah^ge'ah,  she  alone. 

Qk'nob'hah  ge'ah,  we'two  alone. 

sngh  hah'ge  ah,    you  two  alone. 

ho  noh'haH  ge'ah,    they  two  alone. 

kngh  hah'ge  ah,    they  two— fem. — alone. 

dygh  hah'ge  ah,  we  alone;  (speaking  together.) 

a  gygh'hah  ge'ah,    we  alone ;  (speaking  of  ourselves.) 

JQh  hah'ge  ah,    you  alone. 

ho  ng'hah  ge'ah,    they  alone. 

w4  nQh'hah  ge'ah,    they  alone;  (feminine  or  animal.) 


Th<^  letter  *w'  is  often  inserted  after  *h'  in  the  third 
syllable  ^of  *  ha  oh'hah  ge  ah,'  and  *  ga  gh'hah  ge'- 
ah ;'  as,  ha  gh'hwah  ge'ah,'  &o»  But  the  old  Indians 
call  this  a  modernism. 

8.-gyah'da  deh,    I,  me. 

syah'da  deh,    thou,  thee. 

hayah'dadeh,    he,  him. 

yeyah'dadeh,    she,  her. 

oyah'dadeh,    or,    gayah'dadeh,    it;  (animal.) 

di  yah'da  deh,    we  two ;  (speaking  together.) 

agi'yah'dadeh,    we  two;    (speaking  of  ourselves.) 

ji'yah'da  deh,    you  two. 

hi'yah'dadeh,    they  two;  |  masculine. 

gi'yah'da  deh,    we  two  ;  [feminine.  - 


.t»OT,Tl.. 


'■^ife 


-:>S:. 


J(  '■■ 


r-  / 


•l',-"'';'-'':-'"'"''ffJ''t''''*'" 


96 


This  word,  though  called ^a  pronoun,  and,. for  the  most  part,  so 

translated,  is  not  ^i^ctly  such.     It  is  a  compound,  made  upi 

of  *oyah'dah,'  (body,)  and  its  variations,  and  '  gadeh,' 

•  tt  -.  (iia|)pears,  it  stands  out  as  an  object  tangible  to  the  senses.) 

-it    Hence  it  frequently  has  a  verbal  signification;  as,;  ' 

ha  yah'da  deli  Na'wen  ni'yuh,  God  is  in  existence ;  or,  there 

is  a  God. 
a'dihgwah'  ha  yah'da  deh   Na'wen  ni'yuli,     whether  or  not 

there  isa  God,  &g.  .-'i^.j; '.mU-:  ,.!:. -;,*;^h  \1iio  i;,3 


11.     Relative    Pronouns. 


/)     ! 


.!  i-l!  If   .'.•! 


There  are  no  words  in  Seneca,  which  in  all  respects  corres- 
pond with  who,  which,  what,  and  that ;  "but  the  following, 
in  some  of  their  uses,  approximate  so  nearly  to  the  signifi- 
cation of  these  words  as  to  entitle  them  to  be  called  rela** 
tive  pronouns ;  viz:  i 


U-r 


-.;:)  •-.,•1 


dilili...''.  / 


IMI 


neh,    this,  that. 

ne'ne,     the  thing  which,  or  the  person  who,  what. 

neh'huh',     the  thing  which.  :  T 

nan'dah,'    this,  that ;  the  thing  which.       '^'    '■       •    :     ■■ 

he'o  weh,     the  place  where ;  the  thing  which  ;  what. : 

ho'o  weh,     and    neho'oweh,     the  place  where;  the  thing 

which  ;  or,  in  respect  to  which, 
higa,     or,     ho  i'ga,     that  thing  which  it  is.    .''';'■':''.<■■:-•.'? 
ninda'iga,     this  here  thing  which  it  is.         ;■■'      (•'•  -i    i'  •' 


>t; 


The  *ga,'  in  these  two  words,  has  the  force  of  the 
verb  *tobe.'  Both  of  them  may  be  applied  to  persons  as 
well  as  things. 

.      '.V  ■■•■■  ■:•'■'■[;■.■'.  '■■    ;  .,    .      ■■)•:;(       ,Km';  !'U\i:'7  -U 
f,        •■  1 

None  of  these  words  are  declinable.'  and  in  some  of  their 
uses  they  all,  except  *  ne  ne,'  conform  more  closely  with  the 
jiature  of  adverbs,or  demonstrative  pronouns, than  with  relatives. 


WSk: 


h 


^^f(0>^^g»9>r^pmmf^--^^- 


97 


111. Demonstrative,     or,     as     they    are 

'.sometimes   called,   DefinitivePronouns. 

neh,    this,  that,  the  thing,  the  very  thmg,  (or  person.) 
neh  huh',     this,  that ;  this  thing  ;  that  thing ;  that  place, 
nin'dah,    this,  this  thing. 

i'gl,     this,  this  it  is.  .    :.       ,..  . ,       </    ,  .ii 

hi'gl,     this  it  is,  that  it  is.  ,•  ,;    ,  Vi '  .« i;         j  T 

ho  i'ga,     that  there  thing  it  is ;  (sometimes  applied  to  persons 
as  well  as  things.     Se  also  the  note  under  this  word  in  the 
preceding  article, 
si'ga,     or,  sy  i'ga,     that  there  thing  or  person.    ■     •   - 
si'dah,     or,     syi  dah,     that  there  thing.     (These  two  words 
are  compounded  of  *si,'  (look,  behold,  see,)  and  'ga,' 
>        (it  is,)  and  *dah,'  (there,)  and  they  are  applied  to  ob- 
•        jects  at  a  little  distance,  but  always  to  things  in  sight.     So 
' '      also,  of  the  next  word.) 

sida'iga,  or,  syida'iga,  that  there  thing  it  is.  ,,  ;• 
ho  da'i  ga,  that  there  thing  it  is ;  (spoken  of  objects  at  a  dis- 
tance ;  or  on  the  other  side  in  cases  of  contrast ;  and  some- 
'  times  applicable  to  things  out  of  sight  as  well  as  in  sight. ) 
n|n  da'i  ga,  this  here  thing  it  is ;  (sometimes  applied  to 
persons.) 

Most  of  these  words  are  frequently  used   as  Relative 
Pronouns. 

IV. — Interrogative     Pronouns.      ;     .    •  -  \^ 

>.,  .  .      :  \!;i".n  ■'    ■■■; 
SQ  ?  Or,  SQ  oh'  ?    who  ?  who  is  it  ? 
so'nahot?     who  ?  what  person  is  it  ?       •      "     *    ' 
a'?    or,     ah'?    and  sometimes    a'?    what?      l      .: 
a'nahot?    what?  what  is  it? 
so'nah  6h'd4h  ah  ?    who  ?  which  person  ?  who  is  it  ? 
a'nah  oh'dah  ah  ?    what  ?  what  is  it  ? 
.son'dih gwa'nah 6t ?    whoever?  whosoever? 
a'dih  gwa^nah  6t  ?    whatever  ?  whichever  ?     ^^      si. 
sgn'din  gwa'n§.h  6h'dah  4h  ?    whoever  ?  whosoever  ? 
13 


I    sw 


mm 


,^j:^  ^!a^^^^.''     '(^ 


m 


»6 
a'dih  g^va'naJi  6h'dah  |h  ?    whatever  ?  whichever  ? 

These  last  six  forms  are  also  used  without  an  interroga- 
tion, when  a  supposition  is  made,  or  something  is  affirmed 
\ conditionally  ;  as,  *sQ'nah  6h'd4h  ah  nfi  ye'yent  huh' 
o'gwe  nyoh  na  ya'gus  ha'ek,  na'ye  yent'hwa  guh.' 
*  if  any  one  shall  sow,'  or,  *  whosoever  shall  sow,  he 
may  expect  to  reap,'  &c.  .:     .  o. 

The  suffix  '  dah  ^h,'  in  these  words  appears  to  have  a 
verbal  meaning  nearly  equivalent  to  'it is,'  or,  *it 
maybe.' 

The  suffix  *  ngh  6t,'  is  frequently  pronounced  as  if 
written  '  nah  a'ot.'  it  is  difficult  to  give  the  exact  force  of 
it  in  an  English  definition.  Sometimes  it  seems  to  im- 
ply, *  the  material  of  which  any  thing  is  composed  ;'  and 
sometimes  it  .specifies  or  particularizes  the  persoA  or  thing, 
as  in  contradistinction  from  all  other  persons  or  things.  It 
is  used  by  itself,  or  rather,  as  a  suffix  to  the  pronoun 
*neh,'in  the  expression  *neh'nahot,'  or*nehnaha'- 
.:  ot,'  which  means,  *  the  thing  or  material  which  it  is,'  *  this 
'     kind  or  sort  of  thing.'  &c. 

The  forms  ♦son'dih  gwa'nah  6t,'  <Sz;c.,  are  compound- 
ed with  *  a'dih  gwah,'  *  whether ;  it  may  be  so,  or  not.' 


do  ?    how  ?  how  many  ?  how  much  ? 

ga'4  ?  or,  ga  ah'  ?     w.here  ?  what  ?  in  what  place  ? 

ga'a  ni  gaah'  ?    which  ? 

ga'a  Q  weh'  ?    where  ?  at  what  place  ?  where  is  it  ? 

ga'a  gwa'  ?     in  what  direction  1  where  1  whither  ? 

These  words  seem  to  be  interrogative  adverb?,  but  they  / 
are  inserted  here  because  the  Indians  often  use  them  with 
a  pronominal  sipfnification. 

In  all  cases  where  a  question  is  asked,  the  accent  is 
thrown  upon  the  last  syllable  :  and  sometimes  this  peculi- 
arity is  extended  to  all  the  important  words,  even  to  the 
close  of  the  sentence,  however  long  or  however  compli- 
cated it  maybe.  .        .        .     , 


9§ 


rroga- 
firmed 
It  huh' 
I  guh.' 
oWf  he 

have  a 
r,    *it 

i  as  if 
brce  of 
I  to  im- 
1;'  and 
r  thing, 
gs.  It 
ronoun 
nati  a'- 
i,'  *  this 

ipound- 
pr  not.* 


)ut  they  / 
2m  with 

ccent  is 

3  peculi- 

n  to  the 

compU- 


V. — Possessive  Pronouns.  •:,";. 

aga'v/4h,     my,  mine.  •  ,.   > 

sa'wah,    thy,  thine.  '  \     •  '    '      ,  " 

ho'wah,     his. 
go'vvah,     hers, 
o'wah,    its. 

ok  ni'a  w4h,    ours  ;  (dual,  speaking  together.)    seldom  used. 
Q  gya' wah,    ours ;  (dual,  speaking  to  a  third  person.      Some- 
times, also,  used  when  speaking  together. )  .      "■■'"■ 
ja'wah,     yours,  (dual.) 
ygwa'wih,     ours,  (plural,  speaking  together.) 
agwa'w^h,     ours,  (plural,  speaking  to  a  third  person.) 
swa'wah,  ,  yours,  (plural.) 
hona'wah,    theirs,  (dual  and  plural  masculine.) 
ong'wih,     theirs,  (dual  and  plural,  feminine,  and  animal.)   ' 

When  it  is  intended  to  give  emphasis  to  the  idea  of  pos- 
session, or  to  contrast  the  possessor  with  others,  the  per- 
sonal pronouns  are  prefixed  ;  as, — '  so'nah  6h'd|h  ah' 
go' wah  hi  ga'? '  *  who  is  the  particular  person  to  whom 
this  belongs  I '  Answer : — *  lIi  a  ga'wah  ; '  *  it  is  mine.' 


•VI. — Distributive    Pronouns. 

It  is  believed  that  there  are  no  separate  words   in  Seneca 

which  correspond  precisely   with   thf     English  words, 

each,  every,  either,  and  neither.       I'Ji.  ae  which  make 

"      the  nearest  approach  to  the  signification  of  these  words,  are, 

gat  gaah',    any,  cfiiy  one,  either, 
gat  gaah'ni  gaah,     any  one,  either,  whichever. 
ga'4ndigwa'nigaali,     any  one,  either,  whichever,  whichso- 
soever. 

•         The  idea   of  distribution    is   commonly    expressed  by 
.  changes  in  the  principle  word ;   generally  by  suffixes, 
but  sometimes  by  both  suffixes  and  prefixes  ;  as,    ' 


sa'0m»mm 


100 


■-,*(»; 


1.— By  the  suffix  ♦  sh«h.' 


skat*     one.  '      '    , 

akos'shgh',    one  by  ono,  singly,  or  one  at  a  time.  v     » 

dek  ni'shQh,    two  at  a  time,  or  two  by  two. 
sih'shQh',    three  at  a  time,  or  three  by  three, 

JQ  gweh'daad,    one  person  ; 

JQ  gweh'da  shgh',     one  person  at  a  time.  • 

sw4  nis'haad,     one  day  ;      " 

swa  nishaashgh',    one  day  at  a  time,  daily.     - 

"  '  •■.,.' 

oh  gaas'ah,    evening;  (evening, 

oh  gaas  shgh,    or    oh  guas'sQh,     each  evening,  evening  by 

Sometimes  the  noun  is  repeated,  as,    *  oh  gaas'sQh    oh- 
-     ;  gaas'ah.'  .' 

2.— By  the  suffix  *  ngh.' 

de  ga'ah  sa'oh  gwah,     that  on  account  of  which  praise  should 

be  given ; 
de  ga'ah  sa'oh  gwa'noh,     the  matters'  on  account  of  which 

praise  should  be  given,  separately  considered,  or  one 
•     ;   by. one. 

de  yu'da  gwa'ih  doh,     it  is  spread  out,  stretched,  expanded ; 
de  yu'da  gwa'ih  da'noh,     the  things  are  spread  out,  stretched, 
expanded,  one  after  another. 

de  wa'di  yu'gwah  doh,     something  published,  spread  abroad ; 
de  wa'di  yu'gwah  aa'ngh,      matters  published,  notices  spread 
abroad,  one  after  another. 

t  In  these  and  similar  cases,  the  syllable  next  preceding 

.        the  suffix  is  generally,  if  not  always,  made  to  terminate  in 
the  lengthened  sound  of  *  a,' apd  accented. 


^^^■^^■^^!•N^  ■  ?f^'5*ri(^(((l^f*fr^  M-W-*"*^  "^ 


101 


1> 


3. — By  the  suffix  'nygh.'  ^ra  •    •  .    .,.     i 

yus'ha  deh,  the  year ;  (soe  note  on  ♦  ga  deh,'  pp.  78  (k  79 ;) 
yus hade nygh,    the  years  separately  considered,  one  after 
another. 

<le  ga'4h  sa  oh,     glory,  praise,  honour, 
de  ga'ah  s|  o  nyQh,      glories,   praises,  honours,  one    after 
another. 

This  suffix  makes  the  distributive  plural  form  of  a  great 

,    number  of  verbs ;  and  sometimes  it  seems  to  be  used  for 

the  plural,  without  any  idea  of  distribution,  or  separation 

between  the  several  actions  included  in  the  word  to  which 

it  is  appended.     See  note  on  the  bottom  of  p.  79. 

.    .     .   .         :, '.    t 
4. — By  the  suffix  *syQli,'  or 'sygoh.' 

de  ye'gah  sa  nts  hah'syoh,  the  tears  are  dropping  one  after 
another  from  her  eyes. 

dyot  gwah'saih'syoQh,  the  blood  is  flowing  in  many  succes- 
sive places. 

Sometimes  the  suffix  *nyQh,'  is  added  to  'syoh,'  either  to 
give  greater  intensity  to  the  meaning,  or  to  extend  it  t  >  ma- 
;  .'/.    ny  similar  cases,  ono  after  another ;  as, 

de  ye'gah  sa'nis  hah'syo  nyoh,  the  tears  are  dropping  pro- 
fusely one  after  another  from  her  eyes  ;  or,  the  tears  are 

•V  ,■;  dropping,  onejifter  another  from  the  eyes  of  many  per- 
sons, separaiely  considered. 

;  ;  In  this  and  similar  cases,  the  *h'  is  dropped  for  the 
sake  of  euphony.  This  suffix,  ('sygh,')  is  added  to 
verbs  even  more  exclusively  than  'nyoh,'  and  like 
*nyoh,'  it  seems  often  to  be  cmp'oyed  simply  to  denote 
the  plural  number. 

5. — ^By  changing  the  syHable'dah,'  atHhe  end  of  words,  into 


i 


- 


p 


-r*- 


102 

*di,'  after  having  thrown  off  the  *deh,'  in  words  com- 
pounded with  *gadeh.* 

ryah'da  deh,     I,  mo ;  from  *  gyah  dah,'  (my  body,)  and  *  ga- 

deh.' 
gyah'di,     I  alone,  I  by  myself, 
syah'di,    thou  alone,  thou  by  thyself, 
ha  yah'di,    he  alone,  he  by  himself, 
ye  yah'di,    she  alone,  she  by  herself, 
ga  yah'di,    it  alone,  it  by  itself;  (kc 

Perhaps,  however,  this  form,  instead  of  being  made 
by  changing  *  dah '  into  *  di,'  is  to  be  traced  to  the  fol- 
lowing. 

dya'di,  we  two  are  together  by  ourselves ;  (speaking  together.) 
a  gya'di,    we  two  are  together  by  ourselves ;   (speaking  to 

others.) 
ja'di,    you  two  are  together  by  yourselves, 
ya'di,     they  two, — masculine — are  together  by  themselves, 
gya'di,    they  two, — feminine  and  animal — are  together  by 

themselves. 

[These  forms  are  generally  used  with  the  dual  prefix 

*  de  ; '  as  follows : 

dedya'dl,    deya'gyadi,    de  ja'di,   deyadi,    de  gya'di.] 

dwa'di,    we, — plural — ore  together  by  ourselves,  (speaking 

together.) 
a  gwa'di,     we, — ^plural — are  together  by  ourselves,  (speaking 

to  others.) 
swa'di,     you, — plural — are  together  by  yourselves. 
ha'nan  di,   they, — plu.  masculine — are  together  by  themselves, 
wd'nandi,    they, — plu.  feminine,  and  animal — are  together 

by  themselves. 


[These  forms  are  frequently  preceded  by  the  syllable 
*ni,'  probably  taken  from  the  word  *niy9','   (quan- 


\ 


103 

tity,  iiunibor,)  and  always  referring  to  tho  nuaU>cr 
of  tho  persons  spoken  of»  as  follows  : 

nidwa'di,     ni  ya'gwadi,     niswadi',     ni4'nandi,     niw4'- 
nan  dl. 

And  not  unfrequently  the  dual  prefix  *  de»*  is  used  with 
the  plural ;  as, 

dedwa'di,    doswa'di,    wo,  or  you,  are  together ;  &C.      » 

Sometimes,  however,  it  is  pronounced  as  if  written  *di,* 
instead  of  *  de,'  and  may  therefore  be  derived  from  some 
root  of  a  different  signification,  which  cannot  now  bo 
traced  ;  but  which,  with  a  thousand  other  things  to  which 
the  attention  of  the  interpreters  has  never  been  directed,  a 
more  perfect  knowledge  of  the  language  may  bo  expect- 
ed to  reveal.] 

,  The  expression  is  often  made  more  emphatic  by  the  addition  of 
*shQ,'  (only;)  as,  *  gyah'di'shQ,  lonly;  I  by  myself 
alone  ;  dsc.  And  the  emphasis  may  be  still  further  in- 
creased by  prefixing  *  hah  de,'  which  seems  to  have  tho 
forceof  *just,'  *  exactly,'  *  even,'  *  every ;'  (see  p.  80.)  as, 

hah'de  gyali'di'shg,    just  by  myse'f  alone ;  absolutely  alona ; 
entirely  alone ;  (Sec. 

The  *  e '  in  the  second  syllable  of  this  prefix  is  some- 
times dropped  by  contraction  when  the  next  syllable  coni- 
mences  with  a  vowel ;  and  when  the  vowel  is  preceded  by 
*  h,'  this  letter  is  thrown  out  in  order  that  the  contraction 
may  take  place ;  as, 

hah'da'yah  di'sho,    instead  of  hah'de  ha  yah'di'sho,    he  by 
himself;  absolutely  alone ;  &c. 

Some  of  these  words  take  on  verbal  prefixes  and  suffix- 
es, so  as  to  convey  the  idea  of  action  and  causation ;  as, 


•■#  y 


***! 


.1 


\i 


J  r"**         ._''     *'^  «,*&*   — Jit 


^^:£J[^      j<. 


t*t-;  J  M«  L.. .    .-''KJ  ■  Jl"  J 


i      V 


104 

lioli'tagyah'dis,     thou  makest  me  lo  be  by  myself  alone. 

hoh  chgyah'clis  dgh,  or  better,  hah  de'sgyah  dis'doh,  thou 
causedst  me  to  be  by  myself  alone,  &c.  This  nwitter 
will  be  more  fully  explained  in  the  article  npon  verbal  pre- 
fixes and  suffixes. 

6.— By  the  suffix   *a'dyieh.* 

de  wl'nls  hil  ge,     two  days. 

de  wa'nis  hage  a'dyieh,     two  days  by  two  days  in  succession, 

i.  e.  successive  periods  of  two  days  each  ;  once  in  two  days, 
sah  ni  wa'nis  huge,     three  days, 
sfth  ni  wa'nis  huge  a'dyieli,     successive  periods  of  three  days 

each  ;  once  in  three  days  ;  &;c. 

So  also, 

sah  ni  yg'gweh  da'ge  a'dyieh,  three  persons  by  three  per- 
sons ;   successive  companies  of  three  persons  each  ;  &c. 

ye  yah'di  a'dyieh,  she  by  herself  and  she  by  herself,  i.  e.  per- 
son by  person,  one  at  a  time. 

This  suffix  is  added  to  the  first  and  second  person  singu- 
lar of  this  pronoun,  with  a  little  variation  of  the  mean- 
ing; as, 

gyah  di'a  dyieh,  I  am  by  myself  alone  in  successive  in- 
stances ;  or,  I  am  present  by  myself  alone,  now  here, 
now  there,  and  now  in  another  place  ;  or,  from  place  to 
pl'ice,  or  from  time  to  time,  1  am  there  alone. 

syah  di'a  dyieh,  thou  art  present  by  thyself  alone  in  succes- 
sive instances ;  &c. 

Perhaps  'ha  yah'di  adyTeh,'  (he,  die.,)  is  sometimes 
properly  used  in  tlie  same  sense. 

It  should  be  remarked  here,  to,  avoid  mistakes,  that  *  a- 
gyah'di  a'dyieh,'  (  from  a  suffix,  probably  *i,'  meaning 
full,)  should  be  translated,   '  I  have  been,  and  have  finish- 


"m--^^  !»-•..**  M«*  wo  ■»-^i"ilWi»i<''W<l|U« 


►''WIIW   t'w* 


■  11  wym.^- ,  i»*w»tiN»" 


105 


ed,  filling  up  the  body  ;  and  so  of  the  other  forms  of  this 
l)ronoun.  Perhaps  this  suffix  is,  after  all,  the  same  as 
used  above  in  'gyahdi,'  'syah  di,' &c.,  and  the  mean- 
ing in  these  cases  is  derived  originally  from  the  idea  of 
fullness. 


The  accent  is  the  principal  means  of  distinguishing  be- 
tween these  definitions. 

When  this  suffix  is  joined  with  the  dual  and  plural  of 
*  gyah'da  deh,'  the  meaning  seems  to  be  again  slightly 
varied ;  as, 

a  gi'yah'di  a'dyieh,     one  of  us  two  at  a  time  ;  each  of  us  two 

separately  in  turn,  (speaking to  others.) 
ji  yah'di  a'dyieh,     each  of  you  two  separately  in  turn  ;  &c. 

[The  plural  of  *£vah'dadeh,'  was  accidentally  omitted  in 
arranging  the  pages  :  it  should  follow  the  dual,  at  the  bottom  of 
p.  95,  which  see.     It  is  as  follows  : 

dwa yah'da deh,     we,  us;  (speaking  together.) 

a gwa'yah da  deh,     we,  us ;  (speaking  of  ourselves.) 

swa  yali'da  deh,    ye,  you. 

ha  di'yah  da  deh,    they,  them  ;  (masculine  plural.) 

wa  di'yah  da  deh,     they,  them  ;  (feminine  and  animal  plural.) 

o  di'yah  da  deh,     they,  them;  (animal  plural.)  ] 

dwa  yah'di  a'dyieh,     each  of  us  separately  in  turn. 

swa  yah'di  a'dyieh,     each  of  you  separately  in  turn  ;  &c. 

This  suffix  sometimes  follows  the  suffix  *noh,'  (see  p. 
100,)  and  in  such  cases  the  'h'  in  *n9h'  is  omitted, 
and  the  *  a '  in  *  a  dyieh  '  takes  the  nasal  sound,  or  the 
sound  of  *  n,'  apparently  for  the  sake  of  euphony  ;  as, 

de  yu'di  yah'hih  doh,     it  causes  a  hindrance,  it  makes  a  diffi- 
culty ; 

Id 


,v.      >-  ."^J.- 


mM^ta.i  ..iA-ii«<*«».-  - 


J^ 


f 


106 

de  yu'di  yah'hih  da'noh,  there  are  difficulties,  one  after  ano- 
ther ; 

de  yu'di  yah'hih  da'no  an  dyieh,  difficulties  one  by  oae  are 
following  on  successively  after  each  other. 

Sometimes  the  letter   *  s  Ms  added  to  the  *  dyleh  ^  to» 
express  the  idea  of  habitual  or  continual  occurrence* 

Most  of  the  suffixes  introduced  into  this  article  admit  of  va- 
riations to  express  past  and  future  time^  which  will  be  explained 
under  the  head  of  verbal  suffixes. 

Vn. — Indefinite    Pronouns. 

gye,  some ;  (applied  principally  to  things,  but  sometimes  tO; 
persons.) 

gi  yeh',    some  ;  (applied  to  persons.) 

ga'o  nyoh,  some,  here  and  there  one ;  (applied  to  both  per- 
,     sons  and  things.) 

gwa'o  nyoh,  or,  o  gwa'o  nyoh,  some,  sometimes,  here 
and  there  a  little. 

ga'an  dyieh,  some,  sometimes,  one  after  another.  (These 
three  last  words  are  from  *  ga,'  (it  is,)  and  the  suffixes 
*  nyoh,'  and  *  a'dyieh  ;'  and  might  have  been  classed 
with  the  distributive  pronouns,  hut  in  some  of  their  uses 
they  correspond  more  closely  with  the  indefinite,  and  are 
therefore  inserted  here.) 

OS  toh',     some,  a  little. 

ostoh'shoh,     but  little,  just  a  little,  only  a  little. 

ni  yo',     some,  a  little,  a  few,  a  small  number. 

nijo',     there  is  but  little  remaining. 

o  yah',     other,  another. 

gat  gaah',     any,  any  one,  either. 

gat  gaah'ni  gaah,     any  one,  either,  whichever. 

-^a'andigwa'nigaah,  any  one,  either,  whichever,  whichso- 
ever. 

These  two  H^t  are  sometimes  distributive  and  sometimes 
indefinite. 


uF 


».„ 


to 


-  rt<W-*-  •    '.,  LI"»"^<*"'V! 


.  J.pi..^  Ulunft';i,Ut-..r:."gari»>,»ir  l;^- 


107 

LESSON  LXVIII. 

OF  WORDS   USED  TO  DENOTE   THE 
QUALITIES  OF  THINGS; 

called,    in    English    Grammar, 

ADJECTIVES. 


here 


Vi'yu,    good, 
waet'glh,    bad. 

oh  skas',     good,  fit,  convenient,  suitable, 
^vs  dvk',     profitable,  useful, 
gadas',    thick, 
het'glh,     high. 
i  yos,     long, 
go  wa'nah,     great,  large. 
ni  wah'aah,    small, 
ni  wak'aah,     short 
■o'dit,    rough, 
oh  hi',    dry. 
6sdeh,    heavy, 
o  daant',     wretched. 
6t  goh',     poison, 
oh  sa',     fat. 
6t  gos',     raw. 
wa  seh',     new. 
wa'gayoh'    old,  ancient, 
we  ah',     far. 
dus  ga'oh,     near,  nigh, 
a' oh  e  svt,    joyous,  joyful, 
awen'ditgaadeh,     pleasant,  funny,  delightful, 
o  yun'det,     plain,  manifest, 
odoh'hondoh,     abundant,  multitudinous, 
jasdah'ah,     black. 
o  no'waR  dali'ah,     white, 
o'yah  ah,     blue,  sky  colour. 


r\^ 


.-.■.■■^„.  ...„^^'     -I'lir  ■■ImlirilT.llillilnl      tm 


108 


^    f 


gw4ht|h|h,     red.  '  '     "•  "^    ' 

jitgwah'ah,     yellow. 

gaga'ent,     white.  '        !        .    ,      . 

o  ngk'deh,     painful.  '  ' 

ga  gwe'ggh,     all. 

de  yiu'is  gwat,     slippery.  ■ '■■  ' 

de  y u  do' an  jo'oh,     needful,  necessary,  desirable. 

duhgaah'ah,     few,  notmaiiy. 

gano'oli,     hard,  difficult,  precious,  valuable.  * 

deja'oh,    both. 

de  yut'hweh  no  nih,     round. 

de  yus'hak  dooh,     crooked,  bent.  *' 

deyut'yukdah'oh,     dull.  ' 

oniyoh',    hard,  firm,  durable. 

gagaas'deh,     durable,  permanent.  ' 

neh  huh  jih,    right,  proper. 

tga  ye'ih,     right,  perfect. 

odo'gahdoh,     straight,  &c. 

Comparison  of  Adjectives.  ' 

This  is  effected,  not  as  in  English,  by  changes  in  the  word  it- 
self, but  by  adding  or  prefixing  other  separate  words  ;  as, 

wi  yu',    good ; 

a  gwvs  wi  yu',    very  good ;  ' 

he  yii'goh  sot'   v/i  yu',     exceedingly  good  ; 

oh  dyu'deh  sa  is  wi  yu',     unusually  good  ;  ' 

ohsaisdoh   wi  yu',     extremely  good ;  v    :' 

oh'aahdirk'  wi  yu,     surpassingly  good  ;       ' 

syigwa'diah  wiyu',     illimitably  good. 

syi  gwa'deli  jih  wiyu',     good  beyond  all  bounds,  &c. 

WG  suli'  wi  yu',  very  good.  But  when  two  things  are  spo- 
ken of  in  comparison,  *wesuh'  is  applied  to  the  better 
of  the  two  ;  as,  'we  suh  wi  yu'  hoi  g|,'  this  is  better 
than  that. 

wiyu  naga  nae  hoiga,     this  is  good  rather  than  that. 

OS  toil'   wiyu',     or,    wiyu'  cstgh',     a  little  good. 


'  i 


ii'^-'%«r~ 


ff^Bri*'^ 


109 


*n 


The  Superlative  degree  is  somatimes  expresspd  by  a  circumlo- 
cution equivalent  to  *  nothing  like  it ;'  as, 

He  is  the  best  man  I  ever  saw.  De'wan  dgh'  deh  e'yat- 
gaat'hwah  sogaah,  neh  shah  gaat  he'ni  o'gweh  di'yu, 
i.  e.,  1  never  saw  a  man  like  him,  or  equal  to  him  in  respect 
to  being  a  good  man  ;  &c.  .■  ■  .. 


t 

>! 


%i,l.;. 


>, 


Composition    of   Adjectives. 

A  large  proportion,  perhaps  most,  of  the  Adjectives  in  the 
Seneca  admit  of  being  compounded  with  nouns ;  and  after  be- 
ing compounded,  take  on  the  same  suffixes  and  prefixes  which 
either  noun  or  adjective  admit  before  composition. 

The  general  rule  of  composition  appears  to  be,  to  drop  all 
which  follows  the  initial  consonant  of  the  last  syllable  of  the 
noun,  and  also  the  initial  consonant  of  the  adjective,  and  then 
suffix  the  latter  to  the  former  ;  as,  '; 

ogweh'dah,     person,  (see  p.  85,)  and   wiyu,    good. 

o  gweh'di  yu,     good  person. 

ho  gweh'di  yu,     he  is  a  good  man. 

ya  go'gweh  di  yu,     she  is  a  good  woman. 

ho  gweh'di  yu'nall,     ho  was  a  good  man  ;  &c. 

ogweh'dah,     person,  (see  as  before  p.  85,)    waet'gah,    bad. 

o  gweh'da  et'gah,     bad  person. 

ho  gweh'da' et  gah,     he  is  a  bad  person. 

ya  go'gweh  da'et  gah,     she  is  a  bad  person. 

ya  go'gweh  da'et  gak,     she  was  a  bad  person  ;  (Sec. 

So  a^so : 

ga  noh'si  yu,     a  good  house  ;  from    ga  noh  sot,   house,  and 

wiyu. 
ga  ya'dgs  hi'yu,     a  good  book  ;    from  ga  ya'dos  hah,     book, 

writing  ;  and    wi  yu  ;  (used  for  the  Bible.) 


1   <l 


I 


.fc  -.    -^  -J 


i^ssi' 


no 


This  worclt  Hke  most  others  which  end  in  *  hah,'  or 
*  shah,'  is  frequently  spoken  as  if  written,  *  ^  ya'doh- 
chi'yu.'  It  is  difficult  now  to  ascertain  which  torm  is  the 
purest  Seneca,  as  both  are  used  by  old  men  and  good 
speakers. 

ga  gan'yas  hi'yu,  or  ga  gan'yah  chi'yu,  a  good  knife ;  from 
ga  gan'yali  shah,     knife,    and   wi  yu. 

ga  yah'di  yu,  it  is  handsome,  it  has  a  good  body,  or  good 
form,  (spoken  of  animals) ;  from  o  yah'dah,  body, 
(whence   'ga  yah'dah,'  its  body,)  and  wiyu. 

In  compounds  of  *gadeh,'  the  *deh,'  is  dropped  from  the 
end  of  the  noun  before  suffixing  the  adjective  ;  as, 

o  a'deh,    rocid,  path  ; 

o  a'i  yu,     a  good  road,   a  good  path  ; 

oa'et'glh,   a  bad  road,  a  bad  path.        ■  •! 

Adjectives  which  commence  with  the  syllable  *  ni, '  prefix  it 
to  the  noun  to  which  they  are  added  in  composition  ;  as, 

ni  wah'aah,    little,  small ; 
oi'wah,     matter,^  thing ; 
ni  yiu'i  wah'aah,     a  little  matter  or  thing, 
ni  ga'ya  doh'shah  aah',     a  little  book, 
ni  ga'noh  sah'aah,     a  Jittle  house. 

ni  ga'yah  dah'aah,  a  little  creature,  (spoken  of  animals,) 
i.  e.,  it  has  a  little  body. 

Perhaps  this  *  ni,'  is  in  reality  derived  from  *  ne,'  and 
therefore  takes  the  place  which  *  ne '  would  occupy  in 
similar  circumstances. 


•  ' 


There  are  several  adjectives  now  used  in  composition,  which 
cannot  be  traced  back  to  their  original  forms.  They 
appear  as  suffixes  with  a  uniform  adjective  meaning ; 
as, 


•  -\\if-X'ii'-j '.  '■.^-^^'rM' -.j\.iv .''.'.-.  ,:,ii-iHai'f0t^^im}^/.:.:'- 


•  '■   '  .*"■'  <iT»'>.».^''.-»-        y.  ^  ffSf      ~,^ 


-r  «■' 


111 

ganoh'sah,     or    ganoh'sot,     house;      ^         .,  .  y. 

ga  ngh'ses,     long  house  ; 

ga  noh'ses  geh,  at  the  long  house  ;  (frequently  spoken  as 
if  written  'ganoh'sisgeh.')  Commonly  used  for  Coun- 
cil House,  because  the  council  houses  were  generally 
built  of  twice  the  ordinary  proportional  length  of  com- 
mon houses. 

gayah'des,      long   body.     From    *gayah'dah,'   its  body; 

» n|n  dah  ni  ga'yah  dee,'    its  body  is  so  long. 

There  is  a  strong  tendency  among  the  younger  class 

of  Indians  to  change  the  vowel  sound  of  this  suffix  into 

"         *i,'  as  if  the  word  was  written  *  ni  ga'yah  dis,'  instead 

of  *  ni  ga'yah  des,'  but  this  is  a  corruption  of  the  language. 

gawis'dah,    cup;  ' 

gawis'di,    full  cup,  or  cup  full. 

gasheh'dah,     bottle; 

gas  heh'di,  full  botttle,  or  bottle  full ;  used  also  to  mean  one 
quart.  ^ 

ganoh'sah,  or  ganoh'sot,    house; 
ganoh'si,    full  house,  <^c. 

oh  do'gwas  hah,    spoon,  ladle ; 

oh  do'gwah  chi,  full  spoon,  following  the  rule  noticed  above, 
under  *  ga  ya  doh  shah,' and  *  wi  yu.'  (p.  110.) 

So  also, 

gak'chi,  a  plate  full,  a  dish  full ;  from  an  obsolete  root 
meaning  dish,  plate,  &c. 

Adjectives  are  sometimlB^urned  into  nouns  expressive  of 
the  abstract  qualities  which  they  denote,  by  prefixing 
to  them  the  article  *  ne ' ;  as, 

pe  wi'yu,    the  good,  or,  the  goodness. 


\: 


\ 


■    ^''."S] 


:''-M 


'"^i 


/.  :j 


4 


i 


'^-' 


118 


ne'  waet'g41if    the  bad,  or  the  badness;  &c. 

So  also,  they  are  nfiade  verbs,  by  the  use  of  verbal  prefixes 
and  suffixes;  as, 

■  ■  ■      .         .  '  ' 

4wi'yuhhet,    it  will  l^cQme  good,  or  it  will  make  good; 

(i.  e.,  some  object.) 
Iwa'etglht,    or    4^ga'etg&nt,    it  will  become  bod,  or,  it 

will  make  bad,  corrupt,  spoil ;  (i.  e.,  some  obieet.)    But 

thif  matter  will  be  more  fully  explained  under  the  head 

of  *  Verbal  Prefixes  and  Suffixe&'^ 


N 


^'  1.. 


^^ 


a. 


^^■■JX.4^.^ 


Is  Numeral    Adjectives. 


i^'^y 


1  skat,     one.  20    dewvs'hl,    twenty. 

2  dekni',    two.        30    s|h  niWvs'hl,;    thirty.  ^ 

3  s&h,     three.  40    geih'  ni  wtrs'bl,    forty.  < 

4  ge'ih.     four.  50    wis  niwvs'ha,     fifty. 

5  wis,     five.  60    ye  ih'  ni  wvs'h4    sixty. 

6  yeih,    six.  ;         70    jadvk'.njwvs'h I,    seventy. 

7  jadvk',    seven.     80    degyiyh'  niwvs'h4,  eighty. 

8  degyiyh',  eight.    90    dyiuhdoh'  ni  wvs'hl,     ninety. 

9  dyiuhdQh',  nine.    100    skat  de  wlh'iryall  eh^  onehm^ 
^  [dred..    :     :    ':<       ■■:       ' 

10  wvs'hl,    ten.      200     dek  ni'   nah  de'wih  nyali  eh, 
T,;  s  ^' ;    g;,  v^  <  ft  wo  hundred  ;  &c.  -* 

,M  ■.I'/Wvs'lliS- skat  8^'eh,     eleven.       .i.i;i  ,  r^.^i* ,4- i.-vv,^. <iy •$■-.> 

12  wvs'h&  dekni'  sga'eli,    twelve.   jii>HMi(;^g>/..i^'i^?i 

13  wvs'h4  sah  sga^eh,    thirteen. 

14  wvs'hl  geih'  sga'eh,    fourteen. 

15  wvs'hl  WIS  sga'eh,     fifteen. 

16  wvs'hl  yei?i'  sga'eh,    sixteen.  ''  ^ 

17  wvs'hl  jadvk'  sga'eh,    seventeen. 

18  wvs'hl  degyiyh'  sga'eh,   ^fijjerhteen. 


en.     ep^r 


Hi 


jl^^.;  wi-'s'hl:  dyiuhdQh'  sga'dP^'nineteen. 


'■'>■• 


■■r* 


..j. 


-f  •'. . . 


WW-IIWUliMIIIMIMBlUWH 


iW'l^^ai'ft*  *****«**•*■■• 


^ 


-'it 


